JP7362316B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention is capable of performing a normal variable display using normal identification information and a special variable display using special identification information, and is advantageous to the player based on the fact that a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result of the special variable display. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state.

Conventional gaming machines can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and when the variable display is executed, the display period for displaying the result of the variable display (variable display result) is There are special states that can be controlled into special states that have a high probability of being controlled to advantageous states. Furthermore, in such gaming machines, the number of variable displays controlled by the special state is different, and the display period of the variable display result of the final variable display of the special state and the variable display result of the non-final variable display of the special state are displayed. There are some cases where the period is different (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-149189

However, in Patent Document 1, if the display period of the variable display result of the final variable display in the special state is the same as the display period of the variable display result of the non-final variable display, the variable display of the final variable display There is a problem in that the performance is delayed during the result display period, which reduces the interest in the game.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of means A is
A normal variable display based on normal identification information and a special variable display based on special identification information can be executed, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player is created based on a specific display result being displayed as a variable display result of the special variable display. A controllable gaming machine,
a variable means capable of changing from a first state to a second state more advantageous than the first state based on a predetermined display result being displayed as a variable display result of the normal variable display;
variable display pattern determining means capable of determining the variable display pattern of the special variable display from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns including the specific variable display pattern;
result display period determining means capable of determining a display period in which variable display results of the special variable display are displayed;
As a special state in which the variable means is more likely to change to the second state than in the normal state, the first special state can be controlled for a first number of special variable displays, and the second special state can be controlled for the first number of times. state control means capable of controlling over a second number of special variable displays greater than;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining the specific variable display pattern for both the final special variable display in the first special state and the first special variable display in the second special state,
The result display period determining means is capable of determining the first period for the special variable display for which the specific variable display pattern has been determined, and for the special variable display for which the specific variable display pattern has not been determined. a second period shorter than the first period can be determined;
The performance execution means is
When the variable display result of the special variable display is displayed in the first period, it is possible to execute a special effect,
When the special performance is performed in the first special state, the special performance can be performed in a first mode,
When the special performance is performed in the second special state, the special performance can be performed in a second mode,
Suggesting that the special state ends when the special performance is executed in the first mode,
Suggesting that the special state will continue when the special performance is executed in the second mode,
A first operation promotion effect is executed during a period until the final special variable display in the first special state is executed and a period until the first special variable display is executed in the second special state. It is possible to
It is possible to perform a second operation promotion effect when the final special variable display in the first special state and the first special variable display in the second special state are executed;
When executing the second operation promotion performance, it is possible to end the second operation promotion performance in response to the establishment of a special condition;
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of means 1 is
It is possible to perform a normal variable display using normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) and a special variable display using special identification information (for example, a special symbol), and to display a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a variable display result of the special variable display. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player based on the display of a symbol (symbol),
Based on the fact that a predetermined display result (e.g. per normal figure) is displayed as a variable display result of the normal variable display, the first state (e.g. closed state) is changed to a second state more advantageous than the first state (e.g. , an open state) over a predetermined period of time (e.g., 8 seconds);
The variable display pattern of the special variable display is selected from among multiple types of variable display patterns including specific variable display patterns (for example, the variation patterns of PA3-4, PB3-3, and PC3-3 whose special figure variation time is 55 seconds). a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 10-11);
A result display period determining means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 10-13) capable of determining a display period (for example, a symbol confirmation period) during which the variable display results of the special variable display are displayed; ,
As a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which the variable means is more likely to change to the second state than the normal state, a first special state (for example, a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D) is set as a special state for a first number of times. It can be controlled over a variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol up to seven times), and the first number of times can be controlled in the second special state (for example, the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E). state control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. (part to be executed) and
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Prepare,
The variable display pattern determining means is configured to determine the final special variable display in the first special state (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol at the seventh time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D) and the first variable display in the second special state. The specific variable display pattern can be determined for both the special variable display of the number of times (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol of the seventh time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E),
The result display period determining means is capable of determining a first period (for example, 12 seconds or 10 seconds) that is longer than the predetermined period for the special variable display for which the specific variable display pattern has been determined; For a special variable display for which a display pattern has not been determined, a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the predetermined period can be determined (for example, the second period after the end of the jackpot game for jackpot D). A part that determines the variation pattern to be one of PA3-4, PB3-3, and PC3-3 in the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the 7th time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E),
The performance that can be performed by the performance execution means in the result display period of the first period is different from the performance that can be performed by the performance execution means in the result display period of the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-60). In addition, the effects that can be performed during the symbol confirmation period are different depending on whether the symbol confirmation period is 12 seconds, 10 seconds, or 0.5 seconds)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the same performance from being performed in the first period, which is long, as in the second period, which is short, thereby prolonging the performance and reducing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The effects that can be performed by the effect execution means during the result display period of the second period differ depending on the state controlled by the state control means (as shown in FIG. 10-37, the effects of the variable second special symbol If a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds is set after display, if the gaming state is normal, the symbol confirmation period for non-time-saving state will be executed, and if the gaming state is time-saving, the symbol for time-saving state will be displayed. (The part where the fixed period performance is executed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize the controlled state, and different performances are performed depending on the state during the result display period of the second period, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine described in means 1 or 2,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103) which has the variable display pattern determination means, the result display period determination means, and the state control means, and is capable of controlling the progress of the game and transmitting information regarding the game (e.g., performance control commands). ),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a performance based on the information received from the game control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 and 10-33, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to A part that can display the result screen, perform the first meteor effect, second meteor effect, and stock effect based on receiving the command or the three symbol confirmation commands),
The game control means specifies the end of the special variable display in the first special state and the first time in the second special state as special variable display end information that can specify the end of the special variable display. It is possible to transmit different special variable display end information when the special variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-14, the CPU 103 transmits the seventh When the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, the symbol confirmation 2 command is sent, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished for the 7th time in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the symbol confirmation 3 command is sent. (part to send)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect execution means can easily determine whether the finished special variable display is the final special variable display in the first special state or the first special variable display in the second special state. Therefore, control in the effect execution means can be simplified.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, a jackpot type determination table, a small hit type determination table, and a jackpot type. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for performance control and a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows random numerical value judgment processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing symbol confirmation command transmission setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit release preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows small hit end processing. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. It is a timing chart showing the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A. It is a timing chart showing the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B. It is a timing chart showing the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C. It is a timing chart showing the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. It is a timing chart showing the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol process processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of normal symbols and an opening pattern of a normal electric accessory. It is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a symbol confirmation period and an opening/closing period of a normal electric accessory. It is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a symbol confirmation period and an opening/closing period of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a part of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows panel display production processing. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the display pattern determination ratio and each display pattern of panel display performance. 3 is a flowchart showing a result screen display process. It is a flowchart which shows background image update processing. It is a flowchart which shows special production processing. It is a flowchart which shows special production processing. It is a flowchart which shows special production processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows a right-handed hitting notification production process. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E. It is a flowchart which shows preview production decision processing. It is an explanatory diagram of the performance pattern determination ratio of the preview performance and each performance pattern. It is a flowchart which shows ending effect processing. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the image display device at the end of the jackpot game. It is a figure showing the display mode of an image display device when it is controlled to a time saving state. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the image display device in a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the image display device in a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the image display device in a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the image display device in a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the image display device in a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E. It is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during the symbol determination period. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination process during rear variable display in modification 098SG-1. It is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display and the performance pattern of the jackpot suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display in modification example 098SG-1. It is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the production pattern of the jackpot suggestion production in modification 098SG-1. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of setting suggestion performance in modification 098SG-1. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination process during the front part variable display in modification 098SG-1. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during the front variable display when the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance in modification 098SG-1 is determined, and (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during the front variable display. 1 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display when the execution of the setting suggestion effect in 1 is determined, and (C) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display in Modification 098SG-1. It is a diagram showing performance patterns of a character performance and a timer performance executed as a performance, and (D) is a diagram showing a jackpot expectation level of a character performance and a timer performance and an execution expectation level of a setting suggestion performance in modification 098SG-1. . (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance pattern of the character performance in the modification 098SG-1, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance pattern of the timer performance in the modification 098SG-1, and (C ) is a diagram showing the contents of each performance pattern of the timer performance in modification 098SG-1. It is a figure which shows the performance execution period in the variable display of super reach in modification 098SG-1. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E in modification 098SG-3.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 098SG)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 098SG of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-54.

In the display area of the image display device 5, a first pending storage display area 098SG005D and a second pending storage display area 098SG005U are arranged. In the first pending memory display area 098SG005D and the second pending memory display area 098SG005U, a pending memory display that specifiably displays the variable display pending number (special figure pending memory number) corresponding to each special symbol is performed. Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol means that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) occurs based on the starting winnings. In other words, the starting conditions (also referred to as "execution conditions") for executing the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols have been met, but the variable display based on the previously established starting condition is currently being executed, or the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot game state, and when the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display is not established, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. The pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 098SG005D is a pending memory display that is generated based on the starting prize when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening, and is the pending memory display in the second pending memory display area 098SG005U. The pending memory display is a pending memory display generated based on a starting prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening.

In this feature section 098SG, a round white display (displayed in the first pending memory display area 098SG005D) indicates a pending memory display generated based on a starting prize caused by a game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening. A round white display (displayed in the second pending memory display area 098SG005U) is used to display the pending memory display generated based on the starting winnings caused by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. (reserved memory display). In addition, the pending memory display that occurred based on the starting winnings caused by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the starting winnings caused by the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The display mode of the pending storage display that has occurred may be different from the display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, the number of special symbol pending memories is displayed in the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the first pending memory display area 098SG005D and the second pending memory display area 098SG005U. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided for displaying identifiably. The first reservation display 25A specifiably displays the number of stored first special symbols. The second reservation display 25B specifiably displays the second special figure reservation storage number. The first special figure pending storage number is the number of memories in which execution of variable display using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure pending storage number is the number of memories in which execution of variable display using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display pending memory number, which is the sum of the first special figure pending memory number and the second special figure pending memory number, is particularly also referred to as the total pending memory number. When we simply say "number of reserved special symbols", it usually refers to a concept that includes the first number of reserved special symbols, the second number of reserved special symbols, and the total number of reserved memories, but in particular, some of these (e.g. It may also refer to a concept that includes the first special figure pending memory number and the second special figure pending memory number, but excludes the total pending memory number.

On the right side of the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, there is provided a special variable winning ball unit 098SG007 in which a first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A and a second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B are integrated.

Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball unit 098SG007 will be explained. The following description will be made with reference to the up, down, left and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the special variable winning ball unit 098SG007, the left side constitutes the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A, and the right side constitutes the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B. In addition, a cover body (not shown) made of a transparent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 098SG007, and the player can access the special variable winning ball unit through the cover body. The game balls flowing down inside 098SG007, especially inside the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B, can be visually recognized.

The first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A is equipped with a first big winning slot door 098SG701 that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 098SG082 (see Figure 10-2), and can be switched between an open state and a closed state by the first big winning slot door 098SG701. Forming the first big winning opening that changes. The first big prize opening is formed to open upward on the left side of the special variable winning ball unit 098SG007. In addition, the first big prize opening door 098SG701 can be slid in the front and back direction between the closed position where the first big winning opening is closed and the open position where the first big winning opening is opened by the drive of the solenoid 098SG082. ing.

In the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A, when the solenoid 098SG082 is in the ON state, the first big winning hole door 098SG701 opens the first big winning hole, and the game ball passes (enters) the first big winning hole. Make it easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 098SG082 is in the OFF state, the first big winning opening door 098SG701 closes the first big winning opening, making it impossible for the game ball to pass through (enter) the first big winning opening. In this way, the first grand prize opening changes into an open state where game balls can easily pass through (enter), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state where game balls cannot pass through (enter), which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition to the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the first grand prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to pass through (enter) the first grand prize opening. You can.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first big prize opening is detected by the first count switch 098SG023 (see Figure 10-2) provided in the first big prize opening. be done. The game ball that has passed through the first count switch 098SG023 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Based on the detection of game balls by the first count switch 098SG023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the first big winning hole that is in the open state in the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A, other winning holes such as the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole are opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first big winning hole in the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A becomes open, the game ball can enter the first big winning hole, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the first grand prize opening is closed in the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A, it is impossible or difficult to get the prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the first big winning opening. This results in a second state that is disadvantageous for the player.

In addition, most of the game balls that flow down without entering the first grand prize opening are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B by obstacle nails etc. not shown, and if the variable winning ball device 6B is in the expanded open state, the second start is started. You can enter the prize in the prize opening.

The second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B is formed to protrude upward from the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A, and has a second big winning opening that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 098SG083 (see Figure 10-2). It is provided with a door 098SG711, and forms a second big winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state by the second big winning opening door 098SG711. The second big winning hole is formed to open upward at the upper end of the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B. The second big prize opening door 098SG711 is operated between a first state (open state) in which the second big prize mouth is opened by driving the solenoid 098SG083 and a second state (closed state) in which the second big prize mouth is closed. It is provided so that it can be slid in the front and rear directions.

In the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B, when the solenoid 098SG083 for the second big winning hole door 098SG711 is in the on state, the second big winning hole door 098SG711 opens the second big winning hole, and the game ball Make it easier to pass (enter) the two major prize openings. On the other hand, when the solenoid 098SG083 for the second grand prize opening door 098SG711 is in the off state, the second grand prize opening door 098SG711 closes the second grand prize opening, and the game ball passes through the second grand prize opening. Make it impossible to enter. In this way, the second grand prize opening changes into an open state where game balls can easily pass through (enter) and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state where game balls cannot pass through (enter) and is disadvantageous for the player. In addition to the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the second grand prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through (enter) the second grand prize opening is provided. It's okay.

The game ball passing through (entering) the second big prize opening is detected by the second count switch 098SG024A installed in the second big winning opening. Based on the detection of game balls by the second count switch 098SG024A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second grand prize opening that is in the open state in the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B, other ordinary winning holes such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example, More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) the mouth. Therefore, if the second big prize opening is opened in the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B, the game ball can enter the second big prize opening, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the second grand prize opening is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B, it is impossible or difficult to get the prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the second grand prize opening. This results in a second state that is disadvantageous for the player.

In addition, a game ball flow path is formed in the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B, through which the game ball that has passed through the second big winning opening can flow down. A third count switch 098SG024B that can further detect the game balls that have passed through the second count switch 098SG024A is installed in the game ball flow path. The game ball that has passed through the third count switch 098SG024B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. In addition, the game ball that has reached the most downstream part of the branching path 741 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2, and passes through the fourth count switch 24C. , is detected by the fourth count switch 24C.

In addition, in this characteristic part 098SG, based on the fact that a game ball is detected by the third count switch 098SG024B during the small winning game which will be described later, the gaming state after the small winning game is finished is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. There is.

In addition, the passage gate 41 in this characteristic part 098SG is installed between the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B in the special variable winning ball unit 098SG007.

In this feature section 098SG, the game area is divided into a left game area on the left side of the center decorative frame surrounding the image display device 5 arranged at the approximate center position of the game area, and a right game area on the right side. A game ball that is hit weakly with the batting operation handle (hitting to the left) will flow down the left gaming area, and a gaming ball that is hit strongly (hitting to the right) using the batting operation handle will flow down the right gaming area. ing.

In addition, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area can win prizes in the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area can win in the variable winning ball device 6B and the first special variable winning ball device. A large number of obstacle nails are arranged so that 098SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B can win and pass through the passage gate 41. In other words, in the case of left-handed hitting, the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B cannot win and cannot pass through the passage gate 41.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 will be schematically explained.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a variable display of normal symbols is displayed on the normal symbol display 20, such as when a game ball that has passed through a passage gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 10-2. After the normal pattern start condition for execution is satisfied, the normal pattern start condition is established for starting the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the completion of the previous variable display of the normal pattern. Variable display of common symbols by the symbol display device 20 is started.

In this variable display of ordinary symbols, after a predetermined period of time, which is the variable display time of ordinary symbols, has elapsed after the fluctuation of the ordinary symbols has started, the fixed ordinary symbols that are the variable display result of the ordinary symbols are stopped and displayed (derivative display). . At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed regular symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol will be changed to "miss the regular symbol". Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol becoming "normal symbol hit", enlargement opening control (tilting control) is performed in which the movable wing pieces of the electric tulip constituting the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilting position. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position.

After the first starting condition is established due to the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 10-2, For example, based on the first start condition being satisfied due to the completion of the previous special symbol game or jackpot game state, variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. In addition, the second starting condition is established when the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting prize opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 10-2. After that, the second special symbol display device 4B starts variable display of the special symbol based on the second start condition being satisfied, for example, due to the variable display of the previous special symbol or the end of the jackpot game state. .

In the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, when the variable display time as the special symbol variable display time has elapsed, the special symbol A fixed special symbol (variable display result) that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "jackpot" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small win symbol) different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "small win" as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol or the small prize symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "miss".

After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as a specific game state in which rounds (also referred to as "round games") that are advantageous to the player are executed a predetermined number of times. Ru. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "small win", it is controlled to a small win game state as a special game state different from the jackpot game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 098SG, as an example, special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" are used as jackpot symbols, and special symbols showing the number "2" are used as small winning symbols. , a special symbol showing a "-" symbol is a missed symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, and a losing symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The common special symbol may be a jackpot symbol, a small win symbol, or a loss symbol in the variable display of both special symbols.

After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes a "jackpot" as a specific display result, in the jackpot game state, the first big prize opening door of the first special variable prize ball device 098SG007A 230SG701 opens the first grand prize opening until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) passes or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is executed in which the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A is placed in the first state (open state) that is advantageous to the player.

The round, which is the opening cycle of the first big prize opening, can be executed repeatedly until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" or "10"). Furthermore, even before the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round is terminated when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the game ball does not enter the first prize opening). Good too.

In addition, after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes a "small winning" as a specific display result, in the small winning gaming state, the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B The second grand prize opening door 098SG711 opens the second grand prize opening until a predetermined upper limit time (e.g., 3 seconds) passes or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. state. As a result, the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B enters the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 098SG, the second big prize opening door 098SG711 is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) passes during the small winning game state, but the present invention does not have this feature. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be opened multiple times in the small winning game state.

In the small winning game state, when the game ball that enters the second big prize opening passes the third count switch 098SG024B provided in the second special variable prize ball device 098SG007B, the game ball passes through the third count switch 098SG024B. It will be a “jackpot” based on (V winning jackpot). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on detecting passage of the third count switch 098SG024B of the game ball.

In addition, in this characteristic part 098SG, the game ball which won into the 2nd grand prize opening always passes through the 3rd count switch 098SG024B. In other words, when a game ball enters the second big winning slot in the small winning game state, the winning game ball is always detected by the third count switch 098SG024B, and after the small winning game ends, the CPU 103 controls it to the jackpot gaming state. be done. In addition, in this characteristic part 098SG, when the variable display result becomes a small win, the game ball enters the second big prize opening during the small win game, so that the control is always changed to the jackpot game state after the small win game ends. It is now possible to do so.

Then, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 098SG024B of the game ball, the second big winning opening door 098SG711 of the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B is opened for a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). ) or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the second grand prize opening is kept open. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B is placed in the first state (open state) which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in this characteristic part 098SG, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on passage of the third count switch 098SG024B, the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B is controlled to the first state, The present invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A may be controlled to the first state.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big prize opening, can be executed repeatedly until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "9", etc.). In addition, even before the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit, the round game may end due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not enter the second grand prize opening). good.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state in this feature section 098SG, a time saving state in which time saving control is performed within a predetermined variable display number range (for example, 99 times, 7 times, 3 times, 1 time) or a normal state in which time-saving control is not performed. By performing the time saving control, the variable display time in the variable display of the special figure (special figure variable display time) is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state that is different from a specific gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, and is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, initialization processing is performed after the power is turned on). The same control is performed as in the state in which the The time saving control is such that after the end of the jackpot game state, a variable display of the special figure is executed a predetermined number of times, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", and the game ball moves the third count switch 098SG024B in the small win game state. It is only necessary to terminate when one of the conditions of passing is satisfied first.

When the time saving control is performed, the variable display time (special symbol variable display time) in the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is controlled to be shorter than in the normal state. , control to shorten the variable display time of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol variable display time) by the ordinary symbol display 20 than in the normal state, and to control the variable display result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol each time to be "normal". Control to improve the probability of winning a figure than in the normal state, and tilting control time for controlling the tilting of the movable wing in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being a “normal figure winning” The second starting condition can be established by making it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second starting prize opening, such as making the ball longer than in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control is performed that is advantageous to the player by increasing the performance. In this way, the control that is advantageous for the player by making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening due to the time saving control is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all of them) may be performed in combination.

By performing the high opening control, the second starting winning hole is more frequently in the enlarged opening state than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and variable display of the special symbol can be executed frequently. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" or "small win" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed. A gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

FIG. 10-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 098SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-3(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variable display time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in Figure 10-3 (B), the result of determining whether the variable display result is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" (predetermined result) ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be used when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small win" and the small win type is "small win A." Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small win" and the small win type is "small win B."

In addition, in this feature part 098SG, by providing a fifth variable display result designation command and a sixth variable display result designation command, the CPU 103 notifies the performance control CPU 120 of the small winning type in advance before the start of the variable display. Although possible forms are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a variable display result designation command, the CPU 103 indicates to the production control CPU 120 that the variable display result is a "small win". It may also be possible to notify only this in advance before the start of variable display.

Command 8F00H is a variable other than the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D and the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E. This is a symbol confirmation 1 command that specifies the stop (confirmation) of variable display of decorative symbols in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 during display. Command 8F01H is used to display the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L on the image display device 5 in the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. , 5C, and 5R are symbol confirmation 2 commands that specify the stop (confirmation) of variable display of decorative symbols. Command 8F02H is used to display the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L on the image display device 5 in the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E. , 5C, and 5R are three symbol confirmation commands that specify the stop (confirmation) of variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(C), as a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed. Command 9501H is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (high base state, time saving state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure once after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A. Command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the end of the jackpot B jackpot game. Command 9503H is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C. Command 9504H is a fifth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure seven times after the end of the jackpot D jackpot game. Command 9505H is a sixth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time saver state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening notification command that notifies that the big winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds to be executed (for example, "1" to "10") in the jackpot game state or the small win game state. be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the first pending memory display area 098SG005D etc. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the second pending memory display area 098SG005U etc. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that designates the winning determination result at the time of starting winning.

Command D100H is a V winning notification designation command that notifies that a V winning has been won, that is, the third count switch 098SG024B has been turned on because the game ball has passed through the third count switch 098SG024B. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special symbol time saving number notification command that notifies the remaining time saving control number of times of the second special symbol in the time saving state. The command D3XX is a prize ball number notification command for notifying the number of prize balls generated (awarded) when the game ball enters the winning hole.

FIG. 10-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-4, in this characteristic part 098SG, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random number MR2 for determining the variation pattern on the main board 11 side. Numerical data representing each of a numerical value MR3, a random numerical value MR4 for determining a general figure display result, and a random numerical value MR5 for determining an initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

FIG. 10-5 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 098SG. In this characteristic part 098SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit", when the variable display result is a "small win", etc. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "small win" is referred to as a small win variation pattern.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 10-5(A) and 10-5(B), in this feature section 098SG, a plurality of different variation patterns are provided in advance in accordance with the special symbol that performs variable display.

As shown in Figure 10-5 (A), as the variation patterns of the first special symbol, the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, the super reach α, and the super reach variation pattern. There is a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as β is executed. Although this feature section 098SG only provides one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Furthermore, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, etc. may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), among the first special symbol variation patterns in this feature part 098SG, the special symbol variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is executed, the super reach variation It is set shorter than the patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β. In addition, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in this feature part 098SG is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed. The special figure variable display time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 098SG, as mentioned above, the expectation level of jackpot is set high so that the variable display result becomes "jackpot" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation In a pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-5(B), the variation pattern of the second special symbol in this feature part 098SG is a non-reach variation that has a special symbol variable display time different from the variation pattern of the first special symbol. A pattern and a reach variation pattern are provided.

In addition, in this feature section 098SG, as described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. After that, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 10-6, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table and the like are stored that store a plurality of types of variation patterns.

The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include, for example, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), and the table shown in FIG. 10-6 ( In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in C) and the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. (not shown), a deviation variation pattern determination table (not shown), a regular figure display result determination table (not shown), a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 10-6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (the value set by the CPU 103 when executing the special symbol normal processing as a value for specifying the special symbol to perform variable display) is 1 (first), that is, Regarding the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display and the case where the variable display special symbol designation buffer is 2 (second), that is, the case where the second special symbol is subject to variable display. , a determination value for determining a jackpot, and a determination value for determining a small win are set.

As shown in Figure 10-6 (A), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not set. Therefore, if the first special symbol is subject to variable display, only a jackpot can be won, and a small win will not be won.

In addition, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as in the case where the variable display special figure specification buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second Even when the special symbol is subject to variable display, a jackpot will occur with the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and approximately 1/7 of these judgment values will be small. By setting the judgment value corresponding to a hit, if the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the probability (ratio) of winning a small hit is approximately 1/7. There is.

That is, when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in FIG. 10-6(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit shown in FIG. 10-6(A), it is determined that the special symbol will be a small hit. Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 10-6(A) indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit and the probability (proportion) of a small win. In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to use the jackpot symbol. Also, deciding whether to make a small win means deciding whether to control the small win game state or not, but whether to make the stop symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B a small win symbol or not. It also means deciding whether or not to do so.

In this feature section 098SG, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6(A) to determine whether it is a jackpot or a small hit. A separate small hit determination table is provided, and a common table is used to determine the jackpot regardless of the variable display special symbol designation buffer, whether the first special symbol is variable display or the second special symbol is variable display. The small hit determination may be performed using a separate table only when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second one.

In addition, in this feature part 098SG, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is Although it was designed to prevent winning, a portion of the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the jackpot may be set as the determination value corresponding to the small win, so that the small win may be won.

FIGS. 10-6(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Among these, in Figure 10-6 (B), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when Further, in FIG. 10-6(C), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table determines whether the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a jackpot symbol. This is the table that is referenced to determine the In addition, in this feature section 098SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-6 (B) and (C), two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, are provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). On the other hand, only one type of jackpot, jackpot C, is provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol). In other words, the jackpot that occurs when the first special symbol is variablely displayed is one of the two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while when the second special symbol is variablely displayed. The only jackpot that occurs is jackpot C.

FIG. 10-6(D) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table changes the type of small hit to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a small win symbol. This is the table that is referenced to determine the In addition, in this characteristic part 098SG, if the game ball passes the third count switch 098SG024B during a small winning game of small winning A, that is, if a V winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type D is executed. If the game ball passes the third count switch 098SG024B during a small winning game of small winning B, that is, when a V winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game with the jackpot type of jackpot E is executed. It is supposed to be done. In other words, these jackpot D and jackpot E are not the jackpot type determined by the random number MR2 for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning, but are played during the game of either small win A or small win B. This is the jackpot type determined by passing the third count switch 098SG024B.

Here, to explain the jackpot type in this feature part 098SG using FIG. 10-6(E), in this feature part 098SG, as a jackpot type, jackpot A in which time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state ~Jackpot E is set.

Among these jackpots A to jackpot E, jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot A, one time-saving control is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot B is a jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot B ends, the jackpot will be hit again until three special pattern games are executed for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until three special pattern games are executed. Time saving control is executed until this occurs.

Jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot C ends, the jackpot will be played again until the 99th special pattern game is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the 99th special pattern game is executed. Time saving control is executed until this occurs.

Jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) in which the second jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot D ends, the jackpot will be hit again until the 7th special pattern game is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the 7th special pattern game is executed. Time saving control is executed until this occurs.

The jackpot E is a jackpot in which nine rounds (so-called nine rounds) in which the second jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot E, the jackpot will be played again until the 99th special pattern game is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the 99th special pattern game is executed. Time saving control is executed until this occurs.

In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of a "normal hit" increases, making it easier for a small hit to occur than in a normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the end of the time saving state, there are cases where a jackpot occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and cases where the game ball hits a small hit during the game. Since a jackpot may occur by winning a V prize in a game, a so-called consecutive game state occurs in which a jackpot game state tends to occur continuously.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to one, so the variable display of the second special symbol for that one occasion, and the variable display of the second special symbol for that one occasion. The rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four retention memories that occur during the variable display of the second special symbol (the percentage of the total of five times mentioned above) 2) The sum of the percentage of jackpots occurring in the variable display of special symbols and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V is set to about 54%.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to three, so the variable display of the second special symbol for the three times and the three times The rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four retention memories that occur during the variable display of the second special symbol (the percentage of the total of 7 times mentioned above) 2) The sum of the percentage of jackpots occurring in the variable display of special symbols and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V is set to about 66%.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to 7, so the variable display of the second special symbol for the 7 times and the 7 times The rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four retention memories that occur during the variable display of the second special symbol (the percentage of the above total of 11 times) 2) The sum of the percentage of jackpots occurring in the variable display of special symbols and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V is set to about 82%.

In the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot games of jackpot C and jackpot E, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to 99, so the variable display of the second special symbol for the 99 times, The rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in any of the maximum 4 variable displays of the 2nd special symbol based on the retained memory that occur during the 99 variable displays of the 2nd special symbol (total of 103 The sum of the percentage of jackpots occurring in the variable display of the second special symbol of the game and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V is set to approximately 100%.

In addition, in this feature section 098SG, five types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot E, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided, Moreover, four or less types may be provided.

The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and selects a fluctuation pattern among the aforementioned multiple types according to the predetermined result. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination table includes a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot that is used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result a "big hit", and a fluctuation pattern determination table for making the variable display result a "small hit". A jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is prepared in advance, which is used when the variable display result is predetermined as a "loss", and a loss fluctuation pattern determination table is used when it is predetermined that the variable display result will be a "loss". ing.

In particular, the variable pattern determination table for jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol is a variable pattern determination table that is selected when the gaming state is normal, and includes a normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), For each of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α jackpot (PB1-2) and Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined randomness is determined within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. A jackpot variation pattern A is provided in which a numerical value is assigned as a determination value. In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern A, these judgment values are such that when the jackpot type is "jackpot B", the super reach β is easily determined, and when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", By assigning the super reach α so that it is easy to determine, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that it will be a "jackpot B" when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed.

Furthermore, the variable pattern determination table for jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol is a variable pattern determination table selected when the gaming state is a time saving state, and is a variable pattern determination table for non-reach jackpot (PB1-4). ), there is provided a jackpot variation pattern B in which all random numbers within the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take are assigned as determination values.

In addition, the loss variation pattern determination table based on the variable display of the first special symbol includes a loss variation that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is one or less. A pattern determination table A, a variation pattern determination table B for losing which is selected when the gaming state is a normal state and the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol is 3 or more, and a case where the gaming state is a time saving state. A variation pattern determination table C for failure that is selected is prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, there are variation patterns for non-reach misses without shortening (PA1-1), variation patterns for normal reach misses (PA2-1), variation patterns for super reach α misses (PA2-2), and super reach α miss variation patterns (PA2-2). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value for the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) with the reach β out of range within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table B for a miss, there is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol being 3 or more, a normal reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and a normal reach variation pattern (PA1-2). PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern with a deviation of super reach α (PA2-2), and the fluctuation pattern with a deviation of super reach β (PA2-3). A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table C for variation, all of the ranges that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the time saving control are shown. A random value is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), the variation time is shorter in the non-reach out variation pattern (PA1-2) than in the non-reach out variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, by determining a non-reach variation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the retained memories are more easily digested, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By making a starting win when you are in a position, you will be less likely to receive a wasteful starting winning that is not stored in your memory, and if the number of held memories decreases, the fluctuation time will be long. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, thereby making it possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the variable display not being executed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-5(A), the shortened non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-3) selected during time saving control has a higher fluctuation than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2). Time is short. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the time saving control, the variable time is shorter than when the time saving control is not executed (when the gaming state is the normal state). Since the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PA1-3), it is possible to prevent a decrease in game interest due to the variable display of the second special symbol not being started during the time saving control.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source is discharged and the backup power source is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as the special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 098SG150, for example, as shown in FIG. It is being The data holding area 098SG150 for game control shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 098SG153, a game control counter setting section 098SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 098SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 098SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 098SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for variable display result determination, a random number MR2 for winning type determination, a random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 098SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 098SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred, but has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 098SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). Numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for variable display result determination, a random number MR2 for winning type determination, a random number MR3 for fluctuating pattern determination, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 098SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage section 098SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 098SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 098SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 098SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 098SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 098SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 098SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 098SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section 098SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 098SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 098SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 098SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 10-2 stores various data tables used to control the effect operation in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The special pattern variable display performance control pattern corresponds to multiple types of variation patterns, and corresponds to the period from when the special pattern starts changing in the special pattern game until the finalized special pattern that becomes the special pattern display result is derived and displayed. From data indicating the control contents of various performance operations, such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, reach performance, re-lottery performance, etc., or various performance display operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols. It is configured. The preview performance control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of a performance operation that is a preview performance that is executed in response to a plurality of preview patterns prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1.

The special figure variable display performance control pattern may include a plurality of types of ready-to-win performance control patterns in which the performance mode in each ready-to-win performance is different, for example, for each variable pattern for executing the ready-to-win performance.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as data storage for performance control as shown in FIG. 10-8(A). Area 098SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 098SG190 shown in FIG. 10-8(A) includes a production control flag setting section 098SG191, a production control timer setting section 098SG192, a production control counter setting section 098SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 098SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 098SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 098SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 098SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 098SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section 098SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various production operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 098SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 098SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 098SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 098SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 098SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-8(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 098SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 098SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 098SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command and the number of pending memories. Three commands called notification commands (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) are sent as one set from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 098SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition has been met, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 098SG194A of this feature section 098SG, there is a panel corresponding to variable display to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the second special figure variable display corresponding panel display production process (FIG. 10-29), which will be described later. The storage area for setting the panel pattern determined flag indicating that the pattern (panel pattern) of the panel corresponding to the second special figure pending memory has already been determined is the buffer number "2-0" of the second special figure pending memory. ” to “2-4”.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 098SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 098SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 098SG194A shown in Figure 10-8(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 10-8(B), when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the first special pattern pending memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in this characteristic part 098SG, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it is determined whether or not the start prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the pending storage number notification command are received. If commands have been received, these commands may be stored at the beginning of the free area of the start winning reception command buffer 098SG194A as a reserved memory of each special symbol.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 098SG will be explained. FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (098SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (098SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (098SGS102). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 098SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 098SGS102 (098SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 098SG155 is set to "1" (S103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 098SGS101 (098SGS101; N), or when the first special symbol reservation memory number has reached the upper limit value at 098SGS102 (098SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (098SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (098SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (098SGS105). For example, the CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 098SG154. When the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 098SGS105 (098SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 098SG155 is set to "2" (S106) .

After executing either of the processes of 098SGS103 and 098SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (098SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (098SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 098SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 098SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the winning type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 098SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (098SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (098SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 098SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 098SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the hit type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a “big hit” or “small hit”. is used to determine the jackpot type/small win type when the variable display result is a "big hit" or "small win". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 098SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 098SGS110, transmission settings for a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (098SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the process of 098SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random value determination process (098SGS112). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. (098SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 098SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (098SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (Y in 098SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (098SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N at 098SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (098SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-10(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 098SGS 112 in FIG. 10-9 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 098SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 5) is performed to determine the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as a "jackpot". A determination is made as to whether or not to control to a gaming state or to control to a small winning gaming state as a "small winning". Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5, FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random value determination process of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole or second starting winning hole). Accordingly, it is determined whether it is determined that a jackpot symbol or a small prize symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is determined whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "big hit" or "small win", and based on this determination result, the panel display performance is executed by the performance control CPU 120, etc., as described later. become.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 10-10, the CPU 103 first selects and sets the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6(A) (098SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted at 098SGS109 in FIG. 10-9 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (098SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 098SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 calculates the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing a point-by-point comparison. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined at 098SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot during variable display (098SGS123;N), it is determined whether the starting opening buffer value is 1 or not. (098SGS124). When the starting opening buffer value is 2 (098SGS124; N), the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted at 098SGS109 in Figure 10-9 is added to the predetermined small hit determination range. (098SGS125).

If the starting opening buffer value is 1 in 098SGS124 (098SGS124; Y) or if the random value MR1 is not within the small hit determination range in 1098SGS125 (098SGS125; N), set the transmission of the symbol designation command according to the miss. Then, the winning random value determination process ends (098SGS126).

If the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range in 098SGS125 (098SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the small hit is made and the winning random number value determination process is ended (098SGS127).

Then, in 098SGS123, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (098SGS123; Y), a symbol designation command corresponding to the jackpot is set to be transmitted, and the winning random number value determination process is ended (098SGS128). The symbol designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. .

FIG. 10-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 5 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 10-11, the CPU 103 first determines whether the target for setting the variation pattern is the first special symbol (098SGS131). Whether or not the target for setting the variation pattern is the first special figure may be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1".

Then, if the target for setting the fluctuation pattern is the first special figure (098SGS131; Y), the fluctuation pattern judgment table according to the variable display result (whether or not the jackpot flag or small hit flag is set) and the gaming state is set. Select (098SGS132).

Specifically, as mentioned above, the selectable variation pattern determination table is used when the gaming state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot (when the time saving flag is not set and the jackpot flag is set). The jackpot variable pattern determination table A is selected when the gaming state is a time-saving state and the variable display result is a jackpot (when the time-saving flag and the jackpot flag are set). Variation pattern determination table B, when the gaming state is normal, the variable display result is off (time saving flag and jackpot flag are not set), and the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is 1 or less Variable pattern determination table A for loss selected in , the gaming state is normal, the variable display result is loss (time saving flag and jackpot flag are not set), and the number of pending memories of the first special symbol is 3. Variation pattern determination table B for losing, which is selected when the number of winnings is greater than or equal to A pattern determination table C is prepared. Note that these fluctuation pattern determination tables may be such that all values of the random number value MR3 are assigned to one fluctuation pattern, so that only one fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined, Any one of the plurality of variation patterns may be determined by assigning the range value of the random number value MR3 to the plurality of variation patterns without overlapping.

Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number value of MR3 stored in association with the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage unit 098SG151A, and uses the read random number value in the fluctuation pattern determination table selected by the 098SGS132. After determining the associated variation pattern as the variation pattern to be set (098SGS133), the process advances to 098SGS149. That is, in 098SGS133, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the random value MR3 read from the reserved memory and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, if the target for setting the fluctuation pattern is not the first special figure, that is, if it is the second special figure (098SGS131;N), check whether the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting section 098SG152 is on. By determining whether or not it is set (set), it is determined whether the gaming state is a time saving state in which time saving control is performed (098SGS135). If the time saving flag is not set (098SGS135; N), proceed to 098SGS161 shown in Figure 10-12, and if the time saving flag is set (098SGS135; Y), add 1 to the time saving state variable display counter. After updating (098SGS136), it is determined whether the second gaming state flag or the third gaming state flag is set (098SGS137).

In addition, the gaming state flags (first gaming state flag to sixth gaming state flag) are set in response to each gaming state designation command that the CPU 103 sets to send to the production control board 12 in the jackpot end process described later. It's a flag. In this feature section 098SG, the first gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the sending of the first gaming state designation command to the production control board in the jackpot end process, and the second gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the sending of the second gaming state designation command to the production control board in the jackpot end processing, and the third gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the production control board to send the second gaming state designation command in the jackpot ending processing. This is a flag indicating that the transmission setting of the third gaming state designation command has been made to the board, and the fourth gaming state flag is the flag that indicates that the CPU 103 transmits the fourth gaming state designation command to the production control board in the jackpot end processing. This is a flag indicating that the transmission settings have been made, and the fifth gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission of the fifth gaming state designation command to the production control board in the jackpot end process. , the sixth game state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission of the sixth game state designation command to the production control board in the jackpot end process.

In other words, the process of 098SGS137 determines whether or not the CPU 103 configured the production control board 12 to send the second game state designation command or the third game state designation command at the end of the previous jackpot game. Is the time saving state controlled after the end of the game a time saving state in which one time saving control is performed after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, or a time saving state in which time saving control is performed three times after the end of the jackpot game of tail winning B? This is a process for determining whether or not the

If the second gaming state flag or the third gaming state flag is not set (098SGS137; N), proceed to 098SGS172 shown in Figure 10-12, and if the second gaming state flag or the third gaming state flag is set, (098SGS137; Y), it is determined whether the time-saving state variable display number counter indicating the number of variable display times after being controlled to the time-saving state is 1 (098SGS138).

When the time saving state variable display count counter is 1, that is, in the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state (098SGS138; Y), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (098SGS139), and the jackpot is determined. If the flag is set (098SGS139; Y), the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to be the reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB3-2) with a special symbol fluctuation time of 50 seconds shown in Figure 10-5 (B). (098SGS140) and proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (098SGS139; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is set (098SGS141). When the small hit flag is set (098SGS141; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3-2) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 50 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B) ) is uniquely determined (098SGS142) and proceeds to 098SGS149. In addition, if the small hit flag is not set (098SGS141; N), the fluctuation pattern is shown in Figure 10-5 (B). The fluctuation pattern of out-of-reach with a special symbol fluctuation time of 50 seconds (PA3-3) (098SGS143) and proceeds to 098SGS149.

On the other hand, if the time saving state variable display count counter is not 1 (098SGS138; N), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (098SGS144), and if the jackpot flag is set (098SGS144; Y). The fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to be the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB3-1) in which the special symbol fluctuation time is 2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-5(B) (098SGS145), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (098SGS144; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is set (098SGS146). Then, when the small hit flag is set (098SGS146; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3- 1) is uniquely determined (098SGS147) and proceeds to 098SGS149. In addition, when the small hit flag is not set (098SGS146;N), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach out fluctuation pattern (PA3-1) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 2 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B). ) (098SGS148) and proceeds to 098SGS149.

In addition, in 098SGS161, which moves when the judgment is "N" in 098SGS135 because the time saving flag is not set, either the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set at the end of the jackpot game. Determine whether or not there is.

Then, if either the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set, that is, after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot B, the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state, and then the gaming state is changed to Furthermore, when the time saving state is controlled to the normal state (098SGS161; Y), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (098SGS162), and if the jackpot flag is set (098SGS162; Y), The fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to be the reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB3-2) in which the special symbol fluctuation time is 20 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-5(B) (098SGS163), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (098SGS162; N), it is determined whether the small win flag is set (098SGS164). When the small hit flag is set (098SGS164; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3-2) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 20 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B) ) (098SGS165) and proceeds to 098SGS149. In addition, if the small hit flag is not set (098SGS164; N), the fluctuation pattern is shown in Figure 10-5 (B). The fluctuation pattern of out-of-reach with a special symbol fluctuation time of 7 seconds (PA3-2) (098SGS166) and proceeds to 098SGS149.

On the other hand, if neither the second game state flag nor the third game state flag is set, that is, after the game state is controlled to the time saving state after the end of any of the jackpot games from jackpot C to jackpot E, When the gaming state is further controlled from the time saving state to the normal state (098SGS161; N), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (098SGS167), and if the jackpot flag is set (098SGS167; Y). ), the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to be the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB3-2) with the special symbol fluctuation time of 50 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5(B) (098SGS168), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (098SGS167; N), it is determined whether the small win flag is set (098SGS169). Then, when the small hit flag is set (098SGS169; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3- 2) is uniquely determined (098SGS170) and proceeds to 098SGS149. In addition, when the small hit flag is not set (098SGS169;N), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach out fluctuation pattern (PA3-1) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 2 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B). ) (098SGS171) and proceeds to 098SGS149.

Also, if the time saving flag is set (098SGS135; Y), but neither the second gaming state flag nor the third gaming state flag is set, so that the determination is "N" in 098SGS137 (that is, In 098SGS172, which shifts to the time-saving state after the end of any jackpot game from jackpot C to jackpot E), whether or not the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is one of 1 to 6. In other words, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed within six times after being controlled to the time saving state. If the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is one of 1 to 6, 098SGS172;Y), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (098SGS173), and if the jackpot flag is set ( 098SGS173; Y), the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to the reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB3-2) with a special symbol fluctuation time of 20 seconds shown in Figure 10-5 (B) (098SGS174), and to 098SGS149. move on. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (098SGS173; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is set (098SGS175). When the small hit flag is set (098SGS175; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3-2) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 20 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B) ) (098SGS176) and proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, when the small hit flag is not set (098SGS175; N), it is determined whether the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special symbol time saving number counter is 0 (098SGS176a). If the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special symbol time saving number counter is 0 (098SGS176a; Y), the fluctuation pattern is shown in Figure 10-5 (B). The variation pattern (PA3-3) is uniquely determined (098SGS176b) and the process proceeds to 098SGS149.

In addition, if the values of the total time saving number counter and the second special figure time saving number counter are both not 0 (098SGS176a;N), the special figure variation time whose variation pattern is shown in Figure 10-5 (B) is 7 seconds. The non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA3-2) is uniquely determined (098SGS177), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving state variable display number counter is not one of 1 to 6, 098SGS172;N), and it is further determined whether the time-saving state variable display number counter is 7 (098SGS178). When the time saving state variable display count counter is 7 (098SGS178;Y), whether or not the fourth game state flag is set, that is, the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C. It is determined whether or not (098SGS179).

If the fourth game status flag is set (098SGS179; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to one of PB3-2, PC3-2, PA3-3, and PA3-2 by executing the processing of 098SGS173 to 098SGS177. It is decided to proceed to 098SGS149. Also, if the fourth game state flag is not set, that is, if the time saving state is the time saving state after jackpot D or jackpot Eno jackpot game ends (if the fifth game state flag or sixth game state flag is set) If so, 098SGS179;N) determines whether the jackpot flag is set (098SGS180), and if the jackpot flag is set (098SGS180;Y), the fluctuation pattern is shown in Figure 10-5 (B ) is uniquely determined as the reach jackpot variation pattern (PB3-3) in which the special figure variation time is 55 seconds (098SGS181), and proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (098SGS180; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is set (098SGS182). When the small hit flag is set (098SGS182; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3-3) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 55 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B). ) (098SGS183) and proceeds to 098SGS149. In addition, if the small hit flag is not set (098SGS182; N), the fluctuation pattern is shown in Figure 10-5 (B), which is the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a special symbol fluctuation time of 55 seconds (PA3-4). (098SGS184) and proceeds to 098SGS149.

On the other hand, if the time saving state variable display count counter is not 7 (098SGS178; N), or if the fifth gaming state flag is not set (098SGS179; N), whether the sixth gaming state flag is set or not. In other words, it is determined whether the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E (098SGS185).

If the sixth game status flag is not set (098SGS185; N), execute the processes of 098SGS173 to 098SGS177 described above to determine the fluctuation pattern as one of PB3-2, PC3-2, and PA3-2. If the sixth game state flag is set (098SGS185; Y), it is further determined whether the value of the time saving state variable display counter is any value from 8 to 10. , it is determined whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed for the 8th to 10th time after the time-saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E (098SGS186). If the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is any value from 8 to 10, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (098SGS187), and if the jackpot flag is set (098SGS187; For Y), the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to be the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB3-1) with a special symbol fluctuation time of 2 seconds shown in Figure 10-5 (B) (098SGS188), and proceed to 098SGS149. . Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (098SGS187; N), it is determined whether the small win flag is set (098SGS189). Then, when the small hit flag is set (098SGS189; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3- 1) is uniquely determined (098SGS190) and proceeds to 098SGS149. In addition, if the small hit flag is not set (098SGS189; N), the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach out fluctuation pattern (PA3-1) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 2 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B). ) (098SGS191) and proceeds to 098SGS149.

Furthermore, if the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is not one of the values from 8 to 10 (098SGS186;N), it is further determined whether the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is 11 ( 098SGS192), if the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is not 11, that is, if it is the 11th variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E (098SGS192;N), the above-mentioned 098SGS173 ~ Execute the processing of 098SGS177 to determine the fluctuation pattern as one of PB3-2, PC3-2, or PA3-2, and proceed to 098SGS149, and if the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is 11, 098SGS192; Y), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (098SGS193), and if the jackpot flag is set (098SGS193; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed as shown in Figure 10-5 (B). The reach jackpot variation pattern (PB3-2) with a time of 20 seconds is uniquely determined (098SGS194), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (098SGS193; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is set (098SGS195). When the small hit flag is set (098SGS195; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3-2) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 20 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B). ) (098SGS196) and proceeds to 098SGS149. In addition, if the small hit flag is not set (098SGS195; N), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA3-3) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 15 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B). ) (098SGS197) and proceeds to 098SGS149.

In 098SGS149, the CPU 103 updates and stores the determined variation pattern (098SGS149). Then, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the following (098SGS149a). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of 098SGS149a, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of special symbols (098SGS150). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting section sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the 098SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 098SG155 is provided with setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The various commands for which transmission settings have been made are transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

After executing the process of 098SGS150, a special symbol variable display time, which is a variable display time of a special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (098SGS151). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the period from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. The required time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (098SGS152), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the symbol determination period timer is operating (counting the timer) (098SGS201).

If the symbol confirmation period timer is in operation (098SGS201; Y), after decrementing the symbol confirmation period timer by 1 (098SGS213), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out (098SGS214). . If the symbol confirmation period timer has not timed out (098SGS214; N), the special symbol stop processing ends, while if the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out (098SGS214; Y), the stopped symbol is removed and the symbol (098SGS215), and if it is a missed symbol (098SGS215; Y), update the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing. (098SGS216), the special symbol stop processing ends.

Also, if the stopped symbol is not a winning symbol (098SGS215; N), it is determined whether the stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol (098SGS217), and if it is a jackpot symbol (098SGS217; Y), a special symbol is determined. After updating the value of the process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (098SGS218), the special symbol stop processing is ended. In addition to the processing of 098SGS218, a process of setting a jackpot display time timer and setting the number of jackpot openings to an opening number counter may be executed.

In addition, if the stopped symbol is not a jackpot symbol (098SGS217; N), the stopped symbol is a small hit symbol, so the value of the special pattern process flag is set to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small hit pre-release process. After updating to (098SGS219), the special symbol stop processing ends. In addition to the processing of 098SGS219, a process of setting a small win display time timer and setting the number of openings of a small winning to an opening number counter may be executed.

On the other hand, if the symbol confirmation period timer is not operating (098SGS201;N), the variation of the special symbol is ended, and the stopped symbol is stopped displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. (098SGS202). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. Furthermore, the stop symbols are determined at the start of the variable display.

In addition, a symbol confirmation command transmission setting process for transmitting a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 is executed (098SGS203). Then, whether the stored fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (one of PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, PB3-1, and PB3-2 shown in Figure 10-5). It is determined whether or not (098SGS204), and if the stored fluctuation pattern is not a jackpot fluctuation pattern (098SGS204;N), the stored fluctuation pattern is further changed to a small hit fluctuation pattern (Figure 10-5 (098SGS231), and if the stored fluctuation pattern is not a jackpot fluctuation pattern (098SGS231; N). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (098SGS246), and if the time saving flag is not set (098SGS246; N), the second period (0.5 seconds) is set in the symbol confirmation period timer. After setting the corresponding value (098SGS257), make settings to send the gaming state designation command that specifies the normal state corresponding to the time saving flag not being set and the remaining second special symbol time saving number notification command ( 098SGS258), the special symbol stop process ends.

On the other hand, when the stored fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (098SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 sets the game state flag (first game state) if the time saving flag is set. flag ~ 6th game status flag) (098SGS205), and issue a hit start 1 designation command (jackpot A) and a hit start 2 designation command (jackpot B) in accordance with the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. , Make settings for transmitting the winning start 3 designation command (jackpot C) (098SGS207).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (098SGS208). Then, a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) is set in the symbol determination period timer (098SGS209), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the stored fluctuation pattern is a small hit fluctuation pattern (098SGS231; Y), the hit start 4 designation command (small hit A) or hit start 5 corresponding to the small hit is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made to send the specified command (small win B) (098SGS232). Then, it is determined whether the time saving flag is set (098SGS233).

If the time saving flag is not set (098SGS233; N), set the symbol confirmation period timer to a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) (098SGS240), and then check that the time saving flag is not set. Settings are made to transmit the gaming state designation command that designates the normal state corresponding to the normal state and the remaining second special symbol time reduction number notification command (098SGS241), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

In addition, if the time saving flag is set (098SGS233; Y), after decrementing the total time saving number counter by 1 (098SGS234), check whether the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" indicating the first special figure. It is determined whether or not (098SGS235). Then, if the variable special figure designation buffer is not "1" (098SGS235;N), that is, if the target of the stop display is the second special figure, the second special figure time saving number counter is decremented by 1 ( 098SGS236), 098SGS237, and if the fluctuating special figure designation buffer is "1" (098SGS235; Y), that is, if the target for stop display is the first special figure, proceed to 098SGS237 without executing 098SGS236. move on.

In 098SGS237, it is determined whether the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special symbol time saving number counter is 0 or not. Then, if the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special symbol time saving number counter is not 0 (098SGS237; N), set the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) to the symbol confirmation period timer. After setting (098SGS240), settings are made to send a gaming state designation command that specifies the time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving flag being set, and a command to notify the number of remaining second special symbol time-saving times (098SGS241). The symbol stop processing ends.

If the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special symbol time saving number counter is 0 (098SGS237; Y), the time saving flag is cleared (098SGS238), and the total time saving number counter and the second special symbol time saving number of times are cleared. After clearing the counter value (098SGS239), set the symbol confirmation period timer to a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) (098SGS240), and set the normal value corresponding to the time saving flag not being set by clearing. Settings are made to send a gaming state designation command that designates the state (098SGS241), and the special symbol stop processing is ended. In addition, in the process of 098SGS241 when the time saving flag is cleared, since the time saving flag is not set, it is not necessary to perform the setting for transmitting the second special symbol time saving number notification command.

On the other hand, if neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set, but the time-saving flag is set (098SGS246; Y), that is, if the losing symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-saving state, the total time-saving number counter After -1 (098SGS249), it is determined whether the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" indicating the first special figure (098SGS248). Then, if the variable special figure designation buffer is not "1" (098SGS248;N), that is, if the target of the stop display is the second special figure, the second special figure time saving number counter is decremented by 1 ( 098SGS249), 098SGS250, and if the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" (098SGS248; Y), that is, if the target of stop display is the first special figure, proceed to 098SGS250 without executing 098SGS249. move on.

In 098SGS250, it is determined whether the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special symbol time saving number counter is 0 or not. Then, when the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special symbol time saving number counter is 0 (098SGS250; Y), the time saving flag is cleared (098SGS251), and the total time saving number counter and the second special symbol Clear the value of the time saving number counter (098SGS252). In addition, the stored fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern off the first special symbol (any of PA1-1, PA1-3, PA1-3, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in Figure 10-5). ) (098SGS252a).

If the stored fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern off the first special symbol (098SGS252a; Y), set the symbol confirmation period timer to a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) (098SGS240), Settings are made to transmit a gaming state designation command that designates a normal state corresponding to the fact that the time saving flag is not set by clearing (098SGS241), and the special symbol stop processing is ended. If the stored variation pattern is a variation pattern off the second special symbol (any of PA3-1, P3-2, PA3-3, PA3-4 shown in Figure 10-5) (098SGS252a; Y), , Furthermore, it is determined whether the stored variation pattern is PA3-1, which is out of reach and has a special figure variation time of 2000 ms, or PA3-3, which is out of reach and has a special figure variation time of 50000 ms (098SGS252b ).

If the stored fluctuation pattern is PA3-1 or PA3-3 (098SGS252b; Y), set the symbol confirmation period timer to a value corresponding to the first period (10 seconds) (098SGS253) and clear the time saving flag. Settings are made to transmit a gaming state designation command that designates the normal state corresponding to the fact that it is not set by (098SGS258), and the special symbol stop processing is ended. In addition, in the process of 098SGS258 when the time saving flag is cleared, since the time saving flag is not set, it is not necessary to perform the setting for transmitting the second special symbol time saving number notification command. In addition, if the stored fluctuation pattern is PA3-2, which is out of reach and has a special figure fluctuation time of 7000ms, or PA3-4, which is out of reach and has a special figure fluctuation time of 55000ms (098SGS252b;N), Proceed to 098SGS256.

In addition, if the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special figure time saving number counter is not 0 (098SGS250;N), it is further determined whether the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is 7 or not. (098SGS254). If the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is not 7 (098SGS254; N), after setting the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer (098SGS257), the time-saving flag is set. Settings are made to send the gaming state designation command that specifies the time saving state corresponding to the time saving state and the remaining second special symbol time saving number notification command (098SGS258), and while the special symbol stop processing is finished, the time saving state is variable. If the display count counter value is 7 (098SGS254; Y), if the stored fluctuation pattern is PA3-4, which is out of reach and has a special figure fluctuation time of 5500 ms (098SGS255; Y), Proceed to 098SGS256.

In 098SGS256, after setting a value corresponding to the third period (12 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer (098SGS256), a gaming state specification command that specifies the normal state corresponding to the time saving flag not being set and the remaining number of seconds are issued. 2 Settings are made to send the special symbol time reduction number notification command (098SGS258), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the stored fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern other than PA3-4 (098SGS255;N), after setting the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer, the time is shortened. Settings are made to transmit a gaming state designation command that specifies a time saving state corresponding to the flag being set and a remaining second special symbol time saving number notification command (098SGS258), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

In this way, in this feature section 098SG, after the end of the jackpot game, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed for the number of times set in the second special symbol time saving number counter, or the number of times set in the total time saving number counter is executed. The time saving state is set to continue until the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the number of times is executed. For this reason, for example, when the time saving state is controlled in a state where the second special symbol holding memory does not exist, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed before the variable display of the second special symbol. This makes it possible to prevent the player from losing interest due to the player missing an opportunity to win a small prize as a result of the display.

In addition, in conventional pachinko gaming machines, when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the variable display ends, but the pachinko gaming machine with this feature part 098SG 1, when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (see FIG. 10-26).

FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process shown in FIG. 10-13. In the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the value of the variable special symbol designation buffer is 1, that is, whether or not the executed variable display was the first special symbol variable display (098SGS601). . When the value of the variable special symbol designation buffer is 1 (098SGS601; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation 1 command is executed and the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process is ended (098SGS602).

Also, if the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (098SGS601; N), it is determined whether the time saving flag is set (098SGS603). If the time saving flag is set (098SGS603; Y), it is determined whether the time saving flag is set or not. Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the fourth game state flag is set, that is, whether or not the variable display is the variable display after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C (098SGS604). If the fourth game state flag is not set (098SGS604;N), check whether the value of the time-saving state variable display counter is 7 or not, that is, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E. It is determined whether the seventh variable display has ended (098SGS605).

When the value of the time saving state variable display counter is 7 (098SGS605; Y), it is further determined whether the sixth game state flag is set or not, that is, after the end of the jackpot game where the executed variable display is jackpot E. It is determined whether it is a variable display (the seventh variable display in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E) (098SGS606).

If the fifth gaming state flag is set (098SGS606; N), the symbol confirmation command 2 command transmission setting is executed, the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process is completed (098SGS607), and the sixth gaming state flag is set. If so (098SGS606; Y), the symbol confirmation command 3 command transmission setting is executed and the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process is ended (098SGS608).

In addition, if the time saving flag is not set (098SGS603; N), if the fourth game state flag is set (098SGS604; Y), if the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is not 7 (098SGS605; N). ) executes the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation 1 command and ends the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process (098SGS602).

It should be noted that the symbol confirmation command for which transmission settings have been made in the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (S27) shown in FIG.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed at 118 in FIG. 5 as the small win release preprocess. In the small win release preprocessing, the CPU 103 first increments the small win display time timer by 1 (098SGS261), and determines whether the small win display time timer has timed out (098SGS262). If the small hit display time timer has not timed out (098SGS262; N), the small win release pre-processing is finished, while if the small hit display time timer has timed out (098SGS262; Y), the second big prize is won. A value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set to an open time timer for keeping the mouth open (098SGS263). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9" (098SGS264), which is the value corresponding to the process during the opening of the small hit (S119), and the pre-processing before opening the small hit is ended.

FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S119 of FIG. 5 as the small win opening process. In the small hit opening process, the CPU 103 first sets the value of the opening time timer by -1. (098SGS271). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the open time timer has timed out (098SGS272).

If the opening time timer has timed out (098SGS272; Y), the process moves to 098SGS285, and if the opening time timer has not timed out (098SGS272; N), it is determined whether it is the timing to open the second grand prize opening. (098SGS273). If it is the timing to open the second big winning hole, the CPU 103 controls the second big winning hole to open by driving the solenoid 098SG083 for the second big winning hole door 098SG711 (098SGS274). Then, the transmission setting of the big prize opening designation command corresponding to the round is performed (098SGS275), and the process moves to 098SGS276. Incidentally, the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open, which has been set to be transmitted in 098SGS275, is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above. If it is not the timing to open the second grand prize opening (098SGS273; N), the process moves to 098SGS276 without passing through 098SGS274 and 098SGS275.

At 098SGS276, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is time to close the second big prize opening (098SGS276). If it is the timing to close the second big prize opening (098SGS276; Y), the CPU 103 controls the second big prize opening to be closed by driving the solenoid 098SG083 for the second big winning mouth door 098SG711 (098SGS277) . Then, the transmission setting of the specified command after opening the big winning hole according to the round is performed (098SGS278), and the process moves to 098SGS279. In addition, the big prize opening designation command, which is set to be transmitted in 098SGS278, is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above. If it is not the closing timing of the second grand prize opening (098SGS276; N), the process moves to 098SGS279 without passing through 098SGS277 and 098SGS278.

At 098SGS279, the CPU 103 determines whether the third count switch 098SG024B is turned on (098SGS279). If the third count switch 098SG024B is not on (098SGS279; N), the small hit opening process is finished, and if the third count switch 098SG024B is on (098SGS279; Y), the third It is determined whether the V winning flag indicating that the count switch 098SG024B is turned on, that is, that the game ball has passed through the third count switch 098SG024B, is set (098SGS280). If the V winning flag is set (098SGS280; Y), end the small win opening process, and if the V winning flag is not set (098SGS280; N), set the V winning flag (098SGS281). .

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting the V winning prize notification command to the production control board 12 (098SGS282). Incidentally, the V winning prize notification command is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the above-mentioned command control process (S27). In addition, if the second big prize opening is in the open state, the CPU 103 controls the second big prize opening to be in the closed state by driving the solenoid 098SG083 for the second big winning mouth door 098SG711 (098SGS283), and controls the opening time Clear the timer (098SGS284).

Then, in 098SGS285, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10", which is the value corresponding to the small hit ending process (S120) (098SGS285), and ends the small hit opening process.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S120 of FIG. 5 as the small hit ending process. In the small winning ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether the small winning end display timer is in operation. It is determined whether or not (098SGS301). If the small hit end display timer is not operating (098SGS301; N), clear the small hit flag (098SGS302), and set the sending of a winning end designation command according to the small win to the production control board 12 (098SGS303). ). The winning end designation command is sent to the production control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above. Then, a value corresponding to the small winning end display time is set in the small winning end display timer (098SGS304), and the small winning ending process is ended.

On the other hand, if the small hit end display timer is in operation (098SGS301; Y), the value of the small win end display timer is decreased by 1 (098SGS305). Then, it is determined whether the small hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small win end display timer has timed out (098SGS306). If the small hit end display time has not elapsed (098SGS306; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the third count switch 098SG024B is turned on (098SGS307). If the third count switch 098SG024B is not turned on (098SGS307; N), the small hit end process is finished, and if the third count switch 098SG024B is turned on (098SGS307; Y), the third count has already started. It is determined whether the V winning flag indicating that the switch 098SG024B is turned on, that is, that the game ball has passed the third count switch 098SG024B, is set (098SGS308). If the V winning flag is set (098SGS308; Y), the small win ending process is ended, and if the V winning flag is not set (098SGS308; N), the V winning flag is set (098SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the performance control board 12 (098SGS310), and ends the small winning end process. Incidentally, the V winning prize notification command is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the above-mentioned command control process (S17).

Further, when the small winning end display time has elapsed in 098SGS306 (098SGS306; Y), the CPI 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (098SGS311). If the V winning flag is gusseted (098SGS311; Y), the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the jackpot flag (098SGS312, 098SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type from "jackpot D" and "jackpot E" based on the small win type in which the V winning occurred (098SGS314). As for the jackpot type, as shown in Figure 10-6 (D), if the small hit type in which the relevant V winning occurred is "small hit A", the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot D", and the corresponding If the small win type in which the V winning occurred is "small win B," the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot E." Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 098SG155 (098SGS315), the determined jackpot type is set. Store it and proceed to 098SGS316.

After executing 098SGS315, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" (098SGS316), which is the value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114), and ends the small hit ending process.

In other words, in this feature section 098SG, the game ball passes through the third count switch 098SG024B not only during the small winning game, but also during the period after the small winning game ends until the small winning end display time elapses. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the second big prize opening just before the end of the small win game, the game ball will pass through the third count switch 098SG024B and the jackpot game will be executed after the small win end process is completed. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, if the V winning flag is not set in 098SGS311 (098SGS311; N), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110). 098SGS317), the small hit ending process ends.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 5 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (098SGS321). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (098SGS321;N), set the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time to display the jackpot end display on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time). Set (098SGS322) and end the process.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (098SGS321; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (098SGS323). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (098SGS324). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (098SGS324; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is jackpot A (098SGS325). If the jackpot type is jackpot A (098SGS325; Y), set the second special symbol time saving number counter to "1" and set the total time saving number counter to "5" (098SGS326, 098SGS327), and set it to 098SGS339. move on.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is not jackpot A (098SGS325; N), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot B (098SGS328). If the jackpot type is jackpot B (098SGS328; Y), set the second special time saving number counter to "3" and set the total time saving number counter to "7" (098SGS329, 098SGS330), move on.

Furthermore, if the jackpot type is not jackpot B (098SGS328; N), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot C (098SGS331). If the jackpot type is jackpot C (098SGS331; Y), set the second special symbol time saving number counter to "99" and set the total time saving number counter to "100" (098SGS332, 098SGS333), and set 098SGS339. move on.

Further, if the jackpot type is not jackpot C (098SGS321; N), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot D (098SGS334). If the jackpot type is jackpot D (098SGS334; Y), set the second special time saving number counter to "7" and set the total time saving number counter to "11" (098SGS335, 098SGS336), and set it to 098SGS339. move on.

If the jackpot type is not jackpot D (098SGS334;N), the jackpot type is jackpot E, and the second special time saving number counter is set to "99", and the total time saving number counter is set to "100". Set (098SGS337, 098SGS338) and proceed to 098SGS339.

In 098SGS339, the CPU 103 performs transmission settings for a gaming state designation command according to the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game. In addition, in 098SGS339, the CPU 103 issues a second game state designation command if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot A, a third game state designation command if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot B, and a third game state designation command for the executed jackpot. If the jackpot type of the game is jackpot C, the fourth game state designation command is issued. If the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot D, the fifth game state specification command is issued. If the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot E, the command is issued. What is necessary is to execute the transmission setting of the sixth gaming state designation command. Further, the gaming state designation command set to be transmitted in 098SGS339 is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

After executing the process of 098SGS339, the CPU 103 sets the time saving state variable display count counter to "0" and ends the jackpot end process (098SGS340).

As the CPU 103 executes each process as described above, as shown in FIG. 10-19, after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, first, as a time saving state, the second special symbol is displayed variablely for 50 seconds. It is executed across the board. After the variable display ends, the time saving flag is cleared (the gaming state is controlled to the normal state) at the timing when the variable display ends, and the variable display continues for a first period (10 seconds) as a symbol confirmation period. will be stopped. After the first period has elapsed, the second special symbol is variablely displayed for 7 seconds up to four times while the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). In addition, at the end timing of these variable displays, the CPU 103 executes a symbol confirmation command transmission setting process, so that a symbol confirmation 1 command is transmitted to the production control board 12.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, after the jackpot game of jackpot B ends, first, variable display of the second special symbol is executed three times as a time saving state. The first variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed for 50 seconds, and the second and third variable display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 seconds. In addition, in the first and second variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). In the third variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the gaming state is controlled to the normal state), and the first period (10 seconds) is continued as the symbol confirmation period. variable display is stopped. After the first period has elapsed, the second special symbol is variablely displayed for 7 seconds up to four times while the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). In addition, at the end timing of these variable displays, the CPU 103 executes a symbol confirmation command transmission setting process, so that a symbol confirmation 1 command is transmitted to the production control board 12.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-21, after the jackpot game of jackpot C ends, first, variable display of the second special symbol is executed 99 times as a time saving state. The variable display of the second special symbol from the first to the 98th time in the time saving state is executed for 7 seconds, and the variable display of the second special symbol at the 99th time is executed for 50 seconds. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol from the first time to the 98th time, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). In the 99th variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the gaming state is controlled to the normal state), and the first period (10 seconds) is continued as the symbol confirmation period. variable display is stopped. After the first period has elapsed, the second special symbol is variablely displayed for 2 seconds up to four times while the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). In addition, at the end timing of these variable displays, the CPU 103 executes a symbol confirmation command transmission setting process, so that a symbol confirmation 1 command is transmitted to the production control board 12.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-22, after the jackpot game of jackpot D ends, first, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times as a time saving state. The first to sixth variable displays of the second special symbols in the time saving state are executed for 7 seconds, and the seventh variable display of the second special symbols is executed for 55 seconds. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol from the first to the sixth time, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). In the seventh variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the gaming state is controlled to the normal state), and the symbol is determined for a third period (12 seconds). variable display is stopped. After the first period has elapsed, the second special symbol is variablely displayed for 2 seconds up to four times while the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). In addition, in the time saving state, the CPU 103 executes the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process at the end timing of the variable display of the second special symbol for the seventh time, so that the symbol confirmation 2 command is transmitted to the production control board 12. By executing the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process by the PU 103 at the end timing of the variable display in other time-saving states and the variable display after the end of the time-saving state, the symbol confirmation 1 command is sent to the production control board 12. It is set to be sent.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 10-23, after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, first, variable display of the second special symbol is executed 99 times as a time saving state. The first to sixth variable displays of the second special symbols in the time saving state are executed for 7 seconds, and the seventh variable display of the second special symbols is executed for 20 seconds. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol from the first to the sixth time, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). In the seventh variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a third period (12 seconds) as a symbol confirmation period. After the third period has elapsed, variable display of the second special symbol from the 8th to the 11th time is performed for 2 seconds. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol from the 8th to the 11th time, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). Regarding the variable display of the second special symbol from the 12th time onward, the same control as after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C (see FIG. 10-21) is executed. In addition, in the time saving state, the CPU 103 executes the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process at the end timing of the variable display of the second special symbol for the seventh time, so that the symbol confirmation 3 command is transmitted to the production control board 12. By executing the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process by the PU 103 at the end timing of the variable display in the other time saving state, the symbol confirmation 1 command is transmitted to the production control board 12. .

Next, variable display of normal symbols will be explained. FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol process shown in FIG. In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the gate switch 21 is turned on, that is, whether the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 (098SGS351). When the gate switch 21 is turned on (098SGS351; Y), the processing when passing through the regular gate (098SGS352) is executed. In the processing at the time of passing through a general map gate, for example, it is determined whether or not the number of stored standard standard cards is an upper limit value (for example, 4). If the number of stored standard figures is not the upper limit, the number of stored standard figures is incremented by 1, the value of the random number MR4 is extracted, and the extracted value is stored as a new pending memory of standard figures.

After executing the processing when passing through the general map gate or when the gate switch 21 is off (098SGS351; N), the CPU 103 executes any of the processes 098SGS353 to 098SGS357 depending on the value of the general map process flag.

The ordinary symbol normal process of 098SGS353 is executed when the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the normal symbol game (normal symbol variable display) based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the normal symbol normal processing, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is a "hit (ordinary symbol hit)" based on the value of the random number MR4 extracted in the processing when passing through the common symbol gate. Decide before it is displayed (predetermined). Furthermore, in the normal symbol normal processing, a determined normal symbol (either a winning symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the regular symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the ordinary symbol normal processing ends.

The ordinary symbol variation pattern setting process of 098SGS354 is executed when the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is "1". In this normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the ones shown in Figure 10-25 (A) based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "win" and the gaming state. It includes processing to do. In addition, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process in this feature section 098SG, if the display result of the normal symbol is "Lose" and the gaming state is the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is changed to the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1. If the normal symbol display result is "miss" and the gaming state is other than the time saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal symbol (FA1-1). If the fluctuation pattern (FA1-2), which is supposed to have a figure fluctuation time of 30 seconds, is uniquely determined, and the display result of the normal symbol is "hit" and the gaming state is the time saving state, the normal symbol The fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to be the per-win fluctuation pattern (FB1-1) in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is 1 second, and when the display result of the regular symbol is "win" and the gaming state is other than the time-saving state. is a form in which the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is uniquely determined to the winning fluctuation pattern (FB1-2) in which the fluctuation time of the regular symbol is 30 seconds. In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "2", and the normal symbol variation pattern setting process ends.

The ordinary symbol variation process of 098SGS355 is executed when the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is "2". This normal symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for variably displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20, a process of measuring the elapsed time after the normal symbol starts variable display, etc. ing. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols reaches the normal variation time, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the normal symbol variation process ends.

The ordinary symbol stop process of 098SGS356 is executed when the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is "3". This normal symbol stopping process includes a process of making settings to stop the variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display 20 and to stop displaying (deriving) a fixed normal symbol that will be the display result of the normal symbol. ing. Then, when the display result is a "win", the value of the regular pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the display result is "miss", the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to "0".

The normal electric accessory opening process of 098SGS357 is executed when the value of the ordinary figure process flag is "4", and a normal electric accessory opening pattern is set based on this. Then, the process of repeatedly changing the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) between the open state and the closed state is executed by driving the solenoid 81 based on the set normal electric accessory opening pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 098SG, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (A), the 1 normal electric accessory release pattern is uniquely set based on the display result of the normal symbol being "hit". Ru. By setting the normal electric accessory opening pattern, the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) is in the open state for 2 seconds over 8 seconds three times and in the closed state for 1 second twice. Change.

Then, when the control of the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) between the open state and the closed state based on the normal electric accessory opening pattern is completed, the value of the ordinary drawing process flag is updated to "0", The electric accessory release process ends.

By executing the normal symbol process processing as described above, in this feature section 098SG, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "win", the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) is always opened/closed ( (control to open state and closed state) ends in 8 seconds.

In addition, as described above, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 10-26(A), when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, the timing at which the symbol confirmation period of the variable display ends The symbol confirmation period when the time saving flag is cleared and the last variable display in the time saving state ends is the first period (0.5 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-26(A), in the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1, if a regular symbol hit occurs within the symbol confirmation period after the last variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state, the game Opening and closing of the variable winning ball device 6B may be performed until the second special symbol is being variably displayed after the state is controlled to the normal state. At this time, a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B (the first variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state is started, and the game ball enters the variable prize winning ball device 6B when the number of second special symbols pending is 3). variable winning ball device 6B), the variable display of the second special symbol will be executed up to five times after the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, and the second special symbol after the time saving state ends. The ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display of symbols increases excessively.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-26(B), the symbol confirmation period of the last variable display in the time saving state is set to 10 times longer than the period during which the variable winning ball device 6B is opened and closed (normal electric accessory opening and closing period). It was considered to set it to seconds, but even in this case, if a normal symbol hit occurred within the symbol confirmation period after the variable display of the second special symbol at the end of the time saving state, the gaming state would be controlled to the normal state. Since the variable winning ball device 6B may be opened and closed until the second special symbol is displayed later, the second special symbol after the end of the time saving state is the same as in the conventional form shown in FIG. 10-26(A). It has not been possible to solve the problem that the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the variable display is excessively high.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 098SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) and 10-27(B), the symbol confirmation period of the last variable display in the time saving state is changed to normal electric accessory opening/closing. In addition to being set longer than the period, the time saving flag is cleared at the end timing of the last variable display in the time saving state. By doing this, if the variable display of the normal symbol starts during the variable display of the second special symbol at the end of the time saving state, even if the display result of the normal symbol is "hit (ordinary symbol hit)" The opening/closing of the variable winning ball device 6B always ends during the 10 or 12 second symbol determination period, that is, during the period in which the second special symbol pending memory is 4 at most. In other words, in this feature part 098SG, if the variable winning ball device 6B opens and closes during the symbol confirmation period immediately after the time saving control ends, even if a game ball is won in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure will be suspended. The memory can only be stored up to 4, and a new 2nd special symbol pending memory may occur after the first variable display of the 2nd special symbol starts after the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. Since the performance is extremely low, it is possible to prevent the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state from becoming excessively high based on the variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving state as in the conventional pachinko game machine described above. It has become.

Next, the control executed by the production control CPU 120 will be explained.

FIG. 10-28 is a flowchart showing a part of the production control process shown in FIG. In the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 first changes the panel corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed and the second special symbol pending memory to the image display device after the jackpot game of jackpot A and jackpot B ends. Panel display effect processing (098SGS361) for executing a panel display effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot or small win by displaying on 5, jackpot A to jackpot C when the gaming state is the normal state. The number of prize balls received from the CPU 103 during the period from the time when the game state is controlled to one of the jackpot game states until the time when the game state is controlled to the normal state and the variable display starts four times (hereinafter referred to as the consecutive game period) The number of times the notification command or performance process flag has been updated to a value corresponding to the performance processing during a jackpot, etc. The number of times the jackpot game state has been controlled (number of jackpots) and the number of prize balls paid out during the corresponding consecutive game period The number of jackpots and the number of award balls obtained are displayed on the image display device 5, which are counted in the number of jackpots and the number of award balls obtained (098SGS362), which counts the number of jackpots and the number of award balls obtained. Result screen display processing (098SG363), to update the background displayed on the image display device 5 to a first background that indicates that the gaming state is the normal state and a second background image that indicates that the gaming state is the time saving state. background image update process (098SGS364), in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B, the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time and the variable display of the second special symbol for the second and third times (the second special symbol A variable display based on the first pending memory and a variable display based on the second pending memory) to notify that the variable display result is a small hit or a jackpot. Notification performance processing (098SGS365), when the performance mode described later is the second mode, to execute a performance according to the fact that the performance mode is the second mode during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. 2nd mode compatible production processing (098SGS366), V winning notification production (based on the game ball passing the third count switch 098SG024B) based on the receipt of the V winning notification designation command from the CPU 103 during the small winning game V winning notification performance processing (098SGS367) for executing a performance that notifies that the jackpot game state is controlled after the end of the small win game, and a special performance for executing the stock performance or meteor performance as a special performance in the present invention. Performance processing (098SGS368), right-hitting notification performance processing (098SGS369) for executing a right-hitting notification performance that instructs the player to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area (perform right-handed hitting). After that, any one of the processes from S170 to S177 is executed.

FIG. 10-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the panel display performance processing (098SGS363) executed by the performance control CPU 120. In the panel display effect processing shown in FIG. 10-29, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first panel display effect execution flag indicating that the panel display effect is being executed is set ( 098SGS371).

If the first panel display effect execution flag is not set (098SGS371; N), it is further determined whether the second panel display effect execution flag is set (098SGS371a). If the second panel display performance execution flag is set (098SGS371a; Y), proceed to 098SGS389; if the second panel display performance execution flag is not set (098SGS371a; N), the production mode is set to the first It is determined whether the mode is set (098SGS372). In addition, in this feature part 098SG, the first mode and the second mode are preset as production modes, and the first mode is a mode in which the panel display production can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is. In addition, in the second mode, during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state, a performance different from the panel display performance (for example, notification that the variable display result will be a jackpot or small win by operating the push button 31B, etc.) This is a mode that allows you to perform (direction). These performance modes can be selected by the player by operating the push button 31B and stick controller 31A at the end of a jackpot game to be described later. In addition, when the production mode is set to the second mode, the production control CPU 120 executes the above-mentioned second mode compatible production processing (098SG366) to create a production different from the panel display production (second mode compatible production). ) can be executed.

If the production mode is not the first mode (098SGS372; N), the panel display production execution flag is terminated, while if the production mode is the first mode (098SGS372; Y), the game state designation command is received. It is determined whether or not there is (098SGS373). Whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received may be determined based on whether or not a gaming state designation command reception flag is set.

If no gaming state designation command is received (098SGS373;N), the panel display effect processing is ended. On the other hand, if a gaming state designation command is received (098SGS373; Y), the received gaming state designation command is updated and stored (098SGS374).

Then, it is determined whether the gaming state designation command updated and stored in the process of 098SGS374 is the second gaming state designation command or the third gaming state designation command (098SGS375). If the game state designation command updated and stored in the processing of 098SGS374 is the second game state designation command or the third game state designation command (098SGS375; Y), the first panel display performance execution flag is set (098SGS376 ), starts displaying the panel display screen on the image display device 5 (098SGS377), and ends the panel display effect processing. In addition, if the gaming state designation command updated and stored in the processing of 098SGS374 is neither the second gaming state designation command nor the third gaming state designation command (098SGS375;N), the gaming state updated and stored in the processing of 098SGS374 It is determined whether the specified command is the fifth gaming state specifying command or the sixth gaming state specifying command (098SGS376a).

If the game state designation command updated and stored in the process of 098SGS374 is the fifth game state designation command or the sixth game state designation command (098SGS376a; Y), PA3-4 and PB3- whose special figure fluctuation time is 55000ms 3. Determine whether a fluctuation pattern designation command from any of the PCs 3-3 has been received (098SGS376b). If a fluctuation pattern designation command from any of PA3-4, PB3-3, and PC3-3 is received (098SGS376b; Y), the second panel display performance execution flag is set (098SGS376c), and the image display device In step 5, display of the panel display screen is started (098SGS377), and the panel display effect processing is ended.

In addition, if neither the fifth gaming state designation command nor the sixth gaming state designation command is stored (098SGS376a;N), any fluctuation pattern designation command of PA3-4, PB3-4, or PC3-3 is received. If not (098SGS376b;N), the panel display effect processing ends.

In addition, if the panel display performance execution flag is set (098SGS371; Y), in the starting winning reception command buffer 098SG194A098SG194A, the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of buffer number 2-0 indicates that the pattern has been determined. It is determined whether 1 is set (098SGS379).

If the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of buffer number 2-0 is not set to 1 (098SGS379;N), check the reception command buffer 098SG194A at the time of start winning (098SGS380), and set the flag of the buffer number 2-0. It is determined whether or not a symbol designation command is stored in the entry (098SGS381). If no symbol designation command is stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 (098SGS381;N), the panel display effect processing is ended. On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 (098SGS381; Y), it is determined whether the jackpot type specified in 098SGS374 is jackpot B (098SGS382).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A (098SGS382; N), the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined based on the symbol designation command stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 (098SGS383). In addition, in the processing of 098SGS383, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is changed to pattern PN- according to whether the symbol designation command stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 indicates a jackpot, small hit, or loss. It is determined at different ratios from patterns 1 to PN-4.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-30 (A), if the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to pattern PN-1 at a rate of 0%. Then, pattern PN-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, pattern PN-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern PN-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Also, if the symbol designation command indicates a small hit, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to be pattern PN-1 at a rate of 20%, and pattern PN-2 at a rate of 30%. , pattern PN-3 is determined at a rate of 50%, and pattern PN-4 is determined at a rate of 10%. If the symbol designation command indicates an error, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to be pattern PN-1 at a rate of 55%, pattern PN-2 at a rate of 34%, Pattern PN-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern PN-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

As shown in FIG. 10-30(B), pattern PN-1 is a display pattern for displaying the image of character A on the image display device 5, and pattern PN-2 is a display pattern for displaying the image of character B on the image display device 5. Pattern PN-3 is a display pattern for displaying an image of character C on image display device 5, and pattern PN-4 is a display pattern for displaying an image of character D on image display device 5. This is the display pattern.

In other words, in this feature section 098SG, when the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as a corresponding panel during variable display, the proportion that the variable display result becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is set to be the highest, and the image When the character C is displayed on the display device 5, the jackpot expectation is set to be the second highest after the character D is displayed, and when the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, the jackpot expectation is the highest. It is set low (Jackpot expectation level for each character displayed on the image display device 5 as a corresponding panel during variable display: Character D>Character C>Character B>Character A).

Returning to FIG. 10-29, after executing 098SGS383, the production control CPU 120 sets the panel pattern determined flag in buffer number 2-0 to 1 (098SGS384), and also sets the panel pattern corresponding to the variable display of the determined display pattern to 1. After starting display on the image display device 5 (098SGS385), the process advances to 098SGS395.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot B (098SGS382; Y), the panel pattern determined flag in buffer number 2-0 is set to 1 (098SGS386), and the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot B is completed. After starting the display of the corresponding character D-compatible panel on the image display device 5 (098SGS387), the process advances to 098SGS395.

In addition, if the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of buffer number 2-0 is set to 1 (098SGS379;Y), it is determined whether the jackpot type specified in 098SGS374 is jackpot B (098SGS388 ). If the jackpot type is jackpot B (098SGS388; Y), proceed directly to 098SGS395, while if the jackpot type is not jackpot B (098SGS388; N), check the reception command buffer 098SG194A at the time of starting winning (098SGS389 ), it is determined whether a symbol designation command is stored in any of the entries corresponding to the second special symbol pending storage of buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4 (098SGS390). If there is no entry in the second special symbol pending storage in which the symbol designation command is stored (098SGS390; N), the process directly proceeds to 098SGS395. On the other hand, if there is an entry in the second special symbol pending memory in which the symbol designation command is stored (098SGS390; Y), the panel pattern determined flag of the entry is set to "1" indicating that it has been determined. (098SGS391).

If the panel pattern determined flag is set (098SGS391; Y), the process directly advances to 098SGS395. On the other hand, if the panel pattern determined flag is not set (098SGS391; N), the display pattern of the second special symbol pending storage compatible panel is determined based on the symbol designation command stored in the entry (098SGS392 ), sets the panel pattern determined flag of the entry to 1 (098SGS393). Then, the display of the second special symbol reservation storage compatible panel is started in the display pattern determined in the process of 098SGS393 (098SGS394), and the process proceeds to 098SGS395.

In addition, in the processing of 098SGS392, the display pattern of the second special figure reservation storage compatible panel may be determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 10-30 (A) (the same ratio as the processing of 098SGS383), but the present invention The process of 098SGS383 and the process of 098SGS392 may determine the display pattern of the variable display compatible panel and the display pattern of the second special figure reservation storage compatible panel at different ratios.

In 098SGS395, process data corresponding to the variation pattern set at the start of the variable display being executed is checked (098SGS395). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the panel display effect (098SGS396), and if it is not the end timing (098SGS396; N), the panel display effect processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is the end timing (098SGS396; Y), the display of the panel display screen and the display of each panel on the image display device 5 is ended (098SGS397), and the panel display effect execution flag is cleared ( 098SGS398), ends the panel display performance execution flag.

FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the result screen display process (098SGS365) executed by the performance control CPU 120. In the result screen display process shown in FIG. 10-31, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the performance mode is set to the first mode (098SGS400). If the production mode is the second mode (098SGS400; N), the result screen display process ends, and if the production mode is the first mode (098SGS400; Y), it is determined whether the result screen display timer is operating or not. (098SGS401).

When the result screen display timer is not operating (098SGS401; N), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation 2 command or the symbol confirmation 3 command is received (098SGS402).

If the symbol confirmation 2 command or the symbol confirmation 3 command is not received (098SGS402;N), the result screen display process is ended. On the other hand, if the symbol confirmation 2 command or symbol confirmation 3 command is received (098SGS402; Y), set the result screen display period timer to a value corresponding to 21.5 seconds and count the timer (timer operation). After starting (098SGS405), the number of jackpots and the number of won prize balls counted in the jackpot number and number of won prize balls counting process, that is, the number of times the jackpot game state was controlled during the above-mentioned consecutive game period and the corresponding consecutive game period The display of the result screen including the number of prize balls paid out is started (098SGS406), a special effect determination flag is set (098SGS406a), and the result screen display process is ended.

In addition, the 21.5 seconds set in the result screen display period timer in 098SGS405 is the symbol confirmation period (12 seconds) of the variable display of the second special symbol for the seventh time in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. The variable display period (2 seconds x 4) of the second special symbol up to four times after the end of the time saving state, and the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the end of the time saving state. This period is based on the sum of seconds x 3).

In addition, if the result screen display timer is operating (098SGS401; Y), after updating the result screen display period timer by 1 (098SGS407), the stock effect is executed, which indicates that the stock effect described later is being executed. It is determined whether the medium flag is set (098SGS407a). If the stock performance execution flag is set (098SGS407a; Y), the value of the result screen display period timer is set to 0 (the result screen display period timer is timed out) and the process proceeds to 098SGS409 (098SGS407b).

In addition, if the stock performance execution flag is not set (098SGS407a;N), it is determined whether the value of the performance control process flag is 1, that is, whether it is the start timing of the variable display ( 098SGS407c). If the value of the production control process flag is other than 1 (098SGS407c; N), proceed to 098SGS408, and if the value of the production control process flag is 1 (098SGS407c; Y), the fluctuation pattern is set to 50,000ms. It is determined whether it is a reach jackpot PB3-2 or a reach small hit PC3-2 whose special symbol fluctuation time is 50000 ms (098SGS407d). If the variation pattern is PB3-2 or PC3-2 (098SGS407d; Y), execute the processes of 098SGS407b and 098SGS409 described above to end the result screen display process, and if the variation pattern is PB3-2 and PC3-2. If neither (098SGS407d; N), it is determined whether the result screen display timer has timed out (098SGS408).

If the result screen display timer has not timed out (098SGS408; N), the result screen display process is ended, and if the result screen display timer has timed out (098SGS408; N), the process advances to 098SGS409.

Then, in 098SGS409, the display of the result screen is ended, and the result screen display process is ended (098SGS409).

In other words, in this feature section 098SG, the variable display result does not become a small hit or a jackpot in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E (even if it becomes a small hit, V winning does not occur), and the time saving state does not occur. When the process is finished, a result screen is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in the time saving state of jackpot E, the result screen is displayed even when the variable display of the second special symbol seven times is completed even in the time saving state. Then, the result screen ends when 21.5 seconds have elapsed, when the stock effect is executed within the 21.5 seconds, or when variable display of jackpot or small win starts.

FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the background image update process shown in FIG. 10-28. In the background image update process, the production control CPU 120 first specifies the gaming state based on the value of the remaining second special symbol time reduction number, the value of the production control process flag, etc. (098SGS411).

Then, it is determined whether the specified gaming state is a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state (098SGS412).

If it is either a jackpot game state or a small win game state (098SGS412; Y), the background image update process is terminated, while if it is neither a jackpot game state nor a small win game state (098SGS412; N) , Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the state is a normal state in which time saving control is not performed (098SGS413).

When the specified gaming state is the normal state (098SGS413; Y), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed variably (098SGS413a). In addition, whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed variably may be determined by, for example, whether or not each command is stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 of the start winning reception command buffer 098SG194A. . If the second special symbol is being displayed variably (098SGS413a; Y), the background image update process is terminated, and if the second special symbol is not being variably displayed (098SGS413a; N), the pending memory of the second special symbol is It is determined whether there is one (098SGS413b). It should be noted that whether or not there is a pending memory of the second special symbol may be determined by whether or not each command is stored in the entry of buffer number 2-1 of the start winning reception command buffer 098SG194A.

If there is a pending memory for the second special symbol (098SGS413b; Y), the background image update process is terminated, and if there is no pending memory for the second special symbol (098SGS413b; N), the first background image is displayed. It is determined whether it is inside (098SGS414). If the first background image is being displayed (098SGS414; Y), the background image update process ends; if the first background image is not being displayed (098SGS414; N), the background image is changed to the first background. After updating the image (098SGS415), the background image updating process ends. Thereby, when the gaming state is the normal state, the first background image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, if the specified gaming state is not the normal state (098SGS413; N), it is determined whether the second background image is being displayed (098SGS424). If the second background image is being displayed (098SGS424; Y), the background image update process is terminated, while if the second background image is not being displayed (098SGS424; N), the background image is updated to the second background image. After updating to the second background image (098SGS425), the background image update process ends.

FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing an example of special performance processing (098SGS368) executed by the performance control CPU 120. In the special performance processing shown in FIG. 10-33, the performance control CPU 120 first flags a stock performance start waiting flag indicating that execution of the stock performance has been decided but is before the execution timing of the stock performance, or a stock performance is currently being executed. It is determined whether the stock performance execution flag indicating that the stock performance is being executed is in the on state (098SGS611).

If either the stock performance start wait flag or the stock performance execution flag is on (098SGS611; Y), the process proceeds to stock performance processing (098SGS628), while the stock performance start wait flag or stock performance execution flag is turned on (098SGS611; Y). If neither is in the on state (098SGS611;N), a second meteor effect start wait flag or It is determined whether the second meteor effect execution flag indicating that the second meteor effect is being executed is in the on state (098SGS612).

If the second meteor effect start wait flag or the second meteor effect execution flag is on (098SGS612; Y), the process proceeds to 098SGS649 in Figure 10-35, while the second meteor effect execution flag is on. If not (098SGS612; N), it is determined whether the first meteor effect execution flag indicating that the first meteor effect is being executed is on (098SGS613).

If the first meteor effect execution flag is on (098SGS613; Y), the process advances to 098SGS641 in FIG. 10-35, where the first meteor effect is executed based on the meteor effect process data; If the meteor effect execution flag is not on (098SGS613; N), it is determined whether the special effect determination flag is on (098SGS614).

If the special performance determination flag is not on (098SGS614; N), the special performance processing ends, while if the special performance determination flag is on (098SGS614; Y), the special performance determination flag is After changing to the off state (098SGS615), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation 2 command is received or not, that is, whether it is the confirmation display period of the 7th variable display in the time saving state after jackpot D ( 098SGS616).

If the symbol confirmation 2 command is not received (098SGS616; N), that is, if the symbol confirmation 3 command is received, proceed to 098SGS629 in Figure 10-34 and decide to execute the meteor effect or stock effect. . In addition, the special performance determination flag is turned on only when the symbol confirmation 2 command or symbol confirmation 3 command is received in the aforementioned 098SGS401, so the symbol confirmation 2 command is not received in 098SGS616. In this case, only when the symbol confirmation 3 command is received.

On the other hand, if the symbol confirmation 2 command is received (098SGS616; Y), check the reception command buffer 098SG194A at the time of starting winning (098SGS617), and check whether there is a second special symbol pending memory for a hit (big hit or small hit). It is determined whether or not (098SGS618).

If there is no second special figure pending memory for a win (098SGS618; N), the special effect process ends, while if there is a second special figure pending memory for a win (098SGS618; Y), the special effect to be executed is executed. The type of performance is determined by lottery whether it is a meteor effect or a stock effect (098SGS619).

In addition, in this lottery, different ratios are set as the lottery ratio between meteor effects and stock effects depending on the type of win, and if the type of win is a small hit, the meteor effect will be determined by lottery. On the other hand, when the type of hit is a jackpot, the ratio of meteor effects being determined by lottery is low and the proportion of stock performances being determined by lottery is low. In addition, even if the type of win is a small hit, the stock effect may be decided by lottery, albeit at a low rate, and even if the type of win is a jackpot, the meteor effect may be determined by lottery, although at a low rate. may be done.

Therefore, in this feature section 098SG, the expectation level (reliability) that the stock performance will lead to a jackpot is higher than the meteor performance, and the expectation level (reliability) that the meteor performance will lead to a small hit is higher than the stock performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these lottery percentages are set based on the expectation level (reliability level) that the stock performance will have a smaller hit than the meteor performance. ) may be set so that the meteor effect has a higher expectation (reliability) of hitting the jackpot than the stock effect, or if the type of hit is a small hit, the stock effect may be set as a lottery. In other words, if it is a stock performance, the lottery ratio may be set so that the jackpot is confirmed, and if the type of hit is a jackpot, the meteor performance will not be determined by lottery, that is, if it is a meteor performance. If so, the lottery ratio may be set so that a small win is guaranteed.

In addition, in this feature section 098SG, if there is a winning second special figure reservation memory, either the meteor effect or the stock effect is always determined by lottery, but the present invention does not apply to this. This is not limited to, and even if there is a memory of holding the second special figure for these, there will be a certain percentage of cases in which neither the meteor effect nor the stock effect will be decided by lottery (in other words, the non-execution will be Alternatively, even if there is no memory of holding the second special symbol of winning, the execution of the meteor effect may be determined by lottery at a low percentage. Good too.

After the types of these special effects are determined by lottery, it is determined whether or not the meteor effect has been determined by lottery (098SGS620).

If the meteor effect has not been decided by lottery, that is, if the stock effect has been decided by lottery (098SGS620;N), the stock effect start wait flag is turned on (098SGS620a), and the stock effect is set in the stock effect start wait timer. A timer value corresponding to the period up to the start timing is set (098SGS620b), and the special effect processing is ended.

In addition, these stock performance start waiting timers are updated by subtraction in the stock performance process by executing the stock performance process of 098SGS628 every time the timer interrupts, and it is determined whether the timer is up or not, and the stock performance starts. When the wait timer times up, the stock performance start wait flag is turned off, the stock performance execution flag is turned on, the stock performance process table is set, and the stock performance process timer is started. Stock performance is started and the stock performance process of 098SGS628 is executed at each timer interrupt when the stock performance execution flag is in the on state, so that the stock performance is stored in the stock performance process table and the stock performance process timer. Based on this, the process continues until the execution period of the stock effect has elapsed.

On the other hand, when the meteor effect is determined by lottery (098SGS620;Y), the execution timing of the meteor effect is further determined by lottery. Specifically, at the start of the confirmed display period of the 7th variable display in the time-saving state due to jackpot D (confirmed display timing; first meteor effect) and at the start of the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory that is a hit. (Variable win display start timing; second meteor effect) is determined by lottery (098SGS621).

In this feature section 098SG, different ratios are set as the lottery ratio between the confirmed display timing and the variable win display start timing depending on the type of win, and when the type of win is a small win, the confirmed display timing There is a high probability that the timing (first meteor effect) will be determined by lottery, and a low percentage that the winning variable display start timing (second meteor effect) will be determined by lottery, but if the type of win is a jackpot, the confirmed display will be The rate at which the timing (first meteor effect) is determined by lottery is low, and the rate at which the winning variable display start timing (second meteor effect) is determined by lottery is high.

Therefore, in this feature section 098SG, it is more likely to be a jackpot if the meteor effect (second meteor effect) is executed at the winning variable display start timing than when the meteor effect (first meteor effect) is executed at the fixed display timing. The expectation level (reliability) is higher, and it is better to execute the meteor effect (first meteor effect) at the fixed display timing than when the meteor effect (second meteor effect) is executed at the variable display start timing. Although the lottery percentages are set so that the expectation level (reliability) of a small win is high, the present invention is not limited to this, and these lottery percentages are set so that the expectation level (reliability) of a small win is high. In this case, the winning variable display start timing (second meteor effect) will not be determined by lottery, that is, if the meteor effect (second meteor effect) is executed at the variable display start timing, the corresponding You may set up a lottery so that there is always a jackpot in the variable display, or the expectation level (reliability) that the second meteor effect (variable win display start timing) will be higher than the first meteor effect (confirmed display timing). The lottery ratio is set so that the first meteor effect (confirmed display timing) has a higher expectation (reliability) of a jackpot than the second meteor effect (variable win display start timing). Therefore, the expectation level (reliability) of hitting the jackpot may be higher if the meteor effect is executed at an earlier stage from the end of the seventh variable display in the time saving state.

In addition, in this feature part 098SG, the execution timing of the meteor effect is either the fixed display timing or the winning variable display start timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meteor effect is performed at both of these timings. A special performance pattern may be provided to execute the performance, and in this case, the jackpot expectation level (reliability) of the special performance pattern is the same as the jackpot expectation level (reliability) of either the first meteor performance or the second meteor performance. The lottery may be set so that it is higher (for example, 100%) than the percentage (100%).

After the execution timing of the meteor effect is determined by lottery in this way, it is determined whether the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by the lottery is the final display timing (098SGS622).

If the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by lottery is not the fixed display timing, that is, if the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by lottery is the winning variable display start timing (second meteor effect), (098SGS622;N), 2. Turn on the meteor performance start wait flag (098SGS622a), specify the period (wait period) until the start of the variable display that is executed based on the second special symbol holding memory of the winning, and set the waiting period for that period. A timer value corresponding to (waiting period) is set in the second meteor effect start wait timer (098SGS622b), and the special effect processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by lottery is the confirmed display timing (098SGS622; Y), in order to immediately start the first meteor effect, the first meteor effect execution flag is turned on (098SGS623; ), after setting the timer value corresponding to the execution period of the meteor effect (same for the first meteor effect and the second meteor effect) in the meteor effect period timer (098SGS624), select and execute the process table of the meteor effect. At the same time as setting it as a process table (098SGS625), a meteor production process timer is started to advance the meteor production based on the set process table for meteor production (098SGS626), and the first process data in the process table for meteor production is started. After controlling the content and starting the meteor effect (first meteor effect) (098SGS627), the special effect processing ends.

In addition, in the case where the symbol confirmation 3 command is received, if it is determined in the above-mentioned 098SGS616 that the symbol confirmation 2 command is not received, the process proceeds to 098SGS629 in Figure 10-34, and the start winning time reception command The buffer 098SG194A is checked (098SGS629), and it is determined whether there is a second special figure pending memory for a hit (big hit or small hit) (098SGS630).

If there is no second special figure pending memory for a hit (big hit or small hit) (098SGS630; N), the stock performance start wait flag is turned on (098SGS630a), and the stock performance start wait timer is set to start the stock performance. A timer value corresponding to the period up to the timing is set (098SGS630b), and the special effect processing is ended. In this way, in the case of the seventh variable display of the time-saving state due to jackpot E, since the time-saving state continues for a long time after that, it will almost certainly become a jackpot or a small hit, so the second special figure of the hit will be reserved. Even if you have no memory of it, it is suggested that you will almost certainly hit the jackpot or small hit by executing the stock effect.

On the other hand, if there is a second special figure pending memory of a hit (big hit or small hit) (098SGS630; Y), the type of special performance to be executed is determined by lottery whether it is a meteor performance or a stock performance. (098SGS631).

In this characteristic part 098SG, the setting of the determination ratio of the type of special effect in these 098SGS631 is the same as the determination ratio in 098SGS619 described above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting of the determination ratio of the type of special effect in 098SGS631 is The determination ratio of the type of special performance may be different from the determination ratio in 098SGS619.

After determining the type of special performance by lottery, it is determined whether the meteor performance has been determined by lottery (098SGS632).

If the meteor effect has not been determined by lottery (098SGS632; N), the stock effect start wait flag is turned on (098SGS630a), and a timer corresponding to the period up to the start timing of the stock effect is set in the stock effect start wait timer. The value is set (098SGS630b) and the special effect processing ends.

On the other hand, when the meteor effect is determined by lottery (098SGS632; Y), the execution timing of the meteor effect is further changed to the above-mentioned fixed display timing (first meteor effect) and variable hit display start timing (second meteor effect). A lottery is made to decide which one to use (098SGS633). In addition, in this feature part 098SG, the ratio setting of lottery determination in these 098SGS633 is the same as the ratio setting of lottery determination in 098SGS621 described above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery determination ratio setting in 098SGS633 The determination ratio setting may be different from the lottery determination ratio setting in 098SGS621.

After the execution timing of the meteor effect is determined by lottery in this way, it is determined whether the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by the lottery is the final display timing (098SGS624).

If the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by lottery is not the fixed display timing, that is, if the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by lottery is the winning variable display start timing (second meteor effect), (098SGS634;N), 2. Turn on the meteor performance start wait flag (098SGS634a), specify the period (waiting period) until the start of the variable display that is executed based on the second special symbol holding memory of the winning, and set the waiting period for that period. A timer value corresponding to (waiting period) is set in the second meteor effect start wait timer (098SGS634b), and the special effect processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the execution timing of the meteor effect decided by lottery is the confirmed display timing (098SGS634; Y), in order to immediately start the first meteor effect, the first meteor effect execution flag is turned on (098SGS635 ), after setting the timer value corresponding to the execution period of the meteor effect in the meteor effect period timer (098SGS636), select the process table of the meteor effect and set it as the process table to be executed (098SGS637), A meteor production process timer is started (098SGS638) to advance the meteor production based on the production process table, and the content of the first process data in the meteor production process table is controlled to start the meteor production (first meteor production). ) after starting (098SGS639), the special effect processing ends.

Furthermore, if the first meteor effect execution flag is in the on state, it is determined in the aforementioned 098SGS613 that the first meteor effect execution flag is in the on state, and the process proceeds to 098SGS641 in FIG. 10-35 to process the meteor effect. After incrementing the timer by 1 and decrementing the meteor effect period timer by 1 (098SGS642), it is determined whether the meteor effect period timer has timed out (098SGS643).

If the meteor effect period timer has timed out (098SGS643; Y), the meteor effect execution flag is updated to the off state (098SGS648), and the special effect processing ends, while the meteor effect period timer has timed out. If not (098SGS643; N), it is further determined whether the meteor effect process timer has timed out (098SGS644).

Then, if the meteor effect process timer has not timed out (098SGS644; N), the control contents of the meteor effect process data are executed without switching the meteor effect process data (098SGS647), and the special effect processing ends. do. On the other hand, if the meteor effect process timer has timed out (098SGS644; Y), after switching to the next meteor effect process data (098SGS645), the next meteor effect process timer is started (098SGS646). After implementing the control contents of the next switched meteor effect process data (098SGS647), the special effect process is ended. In this way, by switching and sequentially executing the meteor effect process data, the meteor effect is advanced based on the meteor effect process data.

In addition, when the second meteor effect start wait flag or the second meteor effect execution flag is on, the second meteor effect start wait flag or the second meteor effect execution flag is on in the aforementioned 098SGS612. If so, the process proceeds to 098SGS649 in FIG. 10-35, and it is further determined whether or not the second meteor effect execution flag is on.

If the second meteor effect execution flag is on (098SGS649; Y), the process proceeds to 098SGS641 described above, and the processes from 098SGS641 to 098SGS648 are sequentially executed, in the same way as the first meteor effect. A second meteor effect is executed.

On the other hand, if the second meteor effect execution flag is not on (098SGS649;N), that is, if the second meteor effect start wait flag is on, after decrementing the second meteor effect start wait timer by 1, (098SGS650), and determines whether the second meteor effect start wait timer has timed out (098SGS651).

If the second meteor effect start wait timer has not timed out (098SGS651;N), the special effect processing ends, while if the second meteor effect start wait timer has timed out (098SGS651;Y ), turns off the second meteor effect start wait flag (098SGS652), turns on the second meteor effect execution flag (098SGS653), and sets the timer value corresponding to the execution period of the meteor effect to the meteor effect period timer. After setting (098SGS654), the process table for the meteor effect is selected and set as the process table for execution (098SGS655), and the meteor effect process timer is set to proceed with the meteor effect based on the set process table for the meteor effect. (098SGS656), controls the contents of the first process data in the meteor effect process table, and starts a meteor effect (second meteor effect) (098SGS657), and then ends the special effect processing.

FIG. 10-36 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process (S171) executed by the performance control CPU 120. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-36, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether or not the first variable display start command has been received. (098SGS431). If the 1st variable display start command reception flag is set (098SGS431; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the 1st special figure pending memory in the reception command buffer 098SG194A at the time of start winning is set. The various command data stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (098SGS432). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

In addition, if the first variable display start command reception flag is not set (098SGS431;N), it is checked whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, the second variable display start command is received. It is determined whether or not it has been carried out (098SGS433). If the 2nd variable display start command reception flag is set (098SGS433; Y), the buffer number "2-0" to "2-4" of the 2nd special figure pending memory in the reception command buffer 098SG194A at the time of start winning is set. Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (098SGS434). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Furthermore, if the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (098SGS433;N), the variable display start setting process ends.

After executing 098SGS432 or 098SGS434, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (098SGS435), and selects the stop symbol of the decorative pattern according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. (098SGS436).

Further, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state (098SGS437). It should be noted that whether or not the gaming state is the normal state may be determined based on whether or not the remaining time saving number specified from the received second special symbol time saving number notification command is 0 or not.

When the gaming state is the normal state (098SGS437; Y), the variation pattern read from the variation pattern designation command storage area is further used as a second special symbol to be executed based on the second reserved memory at the end of the time saving state. It is determined whether this is the variation pattern of PA3-1 determined when the display is variable (098SGS437a).

If the variation pattern is PA3-1 (098SGS437a; Y), a process table corresponding to the result display corresponding to the pending consumption variation after the end of time saving is selected (098SGS437b), and then the process proceeds to 098SGS448.

On the other hand, if it is not the variation pattern of PA3-1 (098SGS437a;N), a preview performance determination process (098SGS438) is executed to decide to execute a preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display. Thereafter, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern read from the variation pattern designation command storage area is selected (098SGS445), and the process proceeds to 098SGS448.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the normal state but the time saving state (098SGS437; N), whether or not the second gaming state designation command is stored in the gaming state designation command updated and stored in 098SGS374 of the panel display effect processing. That is, it is determined whether the gaming state is a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A (098SGS441). Then, if the second game state designation command is stored (098SGS441; Y), after selecting the process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern and the second special figure time saving number of times being 1 (098SGS442), Proceed to 098SGS448.

In addition, if the second gaming state designation command is not stored (098SGS441;N), whether or not the third gaming state designation command is stored, that is, the jackpot that triggered the time saving state is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is B (whether the gaming state is a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B) (098SGS443). If the third gaming state designation command is stored (098SGS443; Y), the variable patterns are PA3-3 (reach out) with a variable display time of 50 seconds, PB3-2 (reach jackpot), and PB3-2 (reach jackpot). ) or PC3-2 (reach small hit) (098SGS443a).

If the fluctuation pattern is PA3-3 (reach miss), PB3-2 (reach jackpot), or PC3-2 (reach small hit) (098SGS443a; Y), the fluctuation pattern and the 3rd second special After selecting the process table (process table for winning/falsifying notification) corresponding to the first time saving number (098SGS442), proceed to 098SGS448, while PA3-3 (out of reach), PB3-2 (reach jackpot), PC3- 2 (Reach small hit) If it is not any of the fluctuation patterns (098SGS443a;N), after selecting the process table for continuation according to the fluctuation pattern and the 2nd and 3rd times of the 2nd special time saving number of 3 times (098SGS444), proceed to 098SGS448.

Further, if the third game state designation command is not stored (098SGS443;N), it is determined whether or not it is the target variable display of the second meteor effect (098SGS444a). Whether or not the target variable display of the second meteor effect is displayed depends on whether or not PB3-2 (reach jackpot) or PC3-2 (reach small hit) has the second meteor effect execution flag turned on. can be determined.

If it is a variable target display for the second meteor effect (098SGS444a; Y), a process table corresponding to the execution and variation pattern of the second meteor effect is selected (098SGS444b), and then the process proceeds to 098SGS448.

If it is not the target variable display for the second meteor effect (098SGS444a; N), a process table corresponding to the variation pattern read from the variation pattern designation command storage area is selected (098SGS444c), and the process proceeds to 098SGS448.

At 098SGS448, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table.

In addition, each process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). ing.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (098SGS449). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature part 098SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (098SGS450). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (098SGS451). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (S172) (098SGS452).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each reduced by 1. Then, control of the presentation device is executed according to the value of the process timer, variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and decorative pattern is displayed according to the value of the variable display time timer. What is necessary is to stop the variable display of and set the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (S173).

FIG. 10-37 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol waiting process (S173) executed by the production control CPU 120. In the special symbol hit waiting process shown in FIG. 10-37, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the symbol determination period performance execution flag is in the on state (098SGS661). If the symbol determination period performance execution flag is on (098SGS661; Y), the process advances to 098SGS691 shown in FIG. 10-38.

On the other hand, if the symbol confirmation period production execution flag is off (098SGS661; N), after the symbol confirmation period production execution flag is turned on (098SGS662), the symbol confirmation 1 command reception flag is turned on. In other words, it is determined whether the received symbol confirmation command is the symbol confirmation 1 command (098SGS663).

If the received symbol confirmation command is the symbol confirmation 1 command (098SGS663; Y), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the completed variable display is PA3-3 (098SGS664).

If the variation pattern of the finished variable display is PA3-3 (098SGS664; Y), the first hit is a process table for executing the symbol confirmation period performance according to the symbol confirmation period of 10 seconds. After selecting the symbol fixed period production process table for the first hit (098SGS665), start the symbol fixed period production process timer (098SGS666), and control the contents of the first process data in the symbol fixed period production process table for the first hit. (098SGS667), after starting the symbol confirmation period performance for the first hit, the special symbol hit waiting process is ended.

Further, if the variation pattern of the finished variable display is not PA3-3 (098SGS664; N), it is determined whether the variation pattern of the finished variable display is PA3-1 (098SGS668).

If the variation pattern of the finished variable display is PA3-1 (098SGS668; Y), a process for executing the symbol confirmation period performance for the non-time saving state according to the symbol confirmation period being 0.5 seconds. After selecting the symbol fixed period production process table for non-time saving state second special symbol variable display (098SGS669), start the symbol fixed period production process timer (098SGS670), After controlling the contents of the first process data in the pattern confirmation period production process table (098SGS671) and starting the pattern confirmation period production for the non-time-saving second special pattern variable display, the special pattern hit waiting process is ended. .

In addition, if the variation pattern of the finished variable display is not PA3-1 (098SGS668;N), whether the variation pattern of the finished variable display is one of PA3-2, PB, or PC. (098SGS672).

If the completed variable display variation pattern is one of PA3-2, PB3 (PB3-1 to PB3-3), and PC3 (PC3-1 to PC3-3), (098SGS672; Y ), selected the symbol fixed period performance process table for the second special variable display in the short time state, which is a process table for executing the pattern fixed period performance for the short time state in accordance with the symbol fixed period of 0.5 seconds. Later (098SGS673), start the symbol fixed period production process timer (098SGS674), control the contents of the first process data in the symbol fixed period production process table for the time saving state second special symbol variable display (098SGS675), After starting the symbol determination period performance for the second special symbol variable display in the time saving state, the special symbol hit waiting process is ended.

Also, if the completed variable display variation pattern is not one of PA3-2, PB3 (PB3-1 to PB3-3), or PC3 (PC3-1 to PC3-3) (098SGS672;N ), that is, in the case of a variable pattern of the first special symbol, the first special symbol variable display is a process table for executing a symbol determination period effect according to the symbol determination period being 0.5 seconds. After selecting the symbol fixed period production process table for the first special symbol (098SGS676), start the symbol fixed period production process timer (098SGS677), and control the contents of the first process data in the first special symbol variable display symbol fixed period production process table. (098SGS678), and after starting the first special symbol variable display symbol determination period production, the special symbol hit waiting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the received symbol confirmation command is not the symbol confirmation 1 command (098SGS663;N), check whether the symbol confirmation 2 command reception flag is on or not, that is, the received symbol confirmation command is the symbol confirmation 2 command. It is determined whether or not (098SGS679).

If the received symbol confirmation command is the symbol confirmation 2 command (098SGS679; Y), a process for executing the symbol confirmation period effect for ending the time saving state of jackpot D according to the symbol confirmation period being 12 seconds. After selecting the symbol fixed period production process table for ending the time saving state (098SGS680), start the symbol fixed period production process timer (098SGS681), and select the first process data in the symbol fixed period production process table for ending the time saving state. After controlling the contents (098SGS682) and starting the symbol confirmation period effect for ending the time saving state, the special symbol hit waiting process is ended.

Also, if the received symbol confirmation command is not the symbol confirmation 2 command (098SGS679;N), that is, if the received symbol confirmation command is the symbol confirmation 3 command, the symbol confirmation period is 12 seconds. After selecting the symbol fixed period production process table for time saving state continuation which is a process table for executing the symbol fixed period production for time saving state continuation of jackpot E (098SGS683), start the symbol fixed period production process timer (098SGS684) , controls the contents of the first process data in the symbol fixed period presentation process table for time saving state continuation (098SGS685), starts the symbol fixed period presentation for time saving state continuation, and then ends the special symbol hit waiting process.

In addition, in 098SGS691 of FIG. 10-38, which proceeds when the symbol fixed period presentation execution flag is in the ON state, the symbol fixed period presentation process timer is decremented by 1. Then, the symbol fixed period production period timer is incremented by 1 (098SGS692), and it is determined whether the symbol fixed period production period timer has timed out (098SGS693).

If the symbol fixed period production period timer has not timed out (098SGS693; N), it is further determined whether the symbol fixed period production process timer has timed out (098SGS694).

Then, if the symbol fixed period production process timer has not timed out (098SGS694; N), the control contents of the symbol fixed period production process data are executed without switching the symbol fixed period production process data (098SGS697). , ends the special drawing waiting process.

On the other hand, if the symbol fixed period production process timer has timed out (098SGS694; Y), after switching to the next symbol fixed period production process data (098SGS695), the next symbol fixed period production process timer (098SGS696), and after implementing the control contents of the next switched symbol fixed period production process data (098SGS697), the special symbol hit waiting process is ended.

In addition, if the symbol fixed period production period timer times out (098SGS693; Y), after turning off the symbol fixed period production execution flag (098SGS698), check whether or not a hit start designation command indicating a jackpot has been received. (098SGS699).

When a winning start designation command indicating a jackpot is received (098SGS699; Y), the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during the jackpot (098SGS700), and the special symbol winning waiting process is ended. On the other hand, if a winning start designation command indicating a jackpot has not been received (098SGS699;N), it is determined whether a winning start designation command indicating a small win has been received (098SGS701). When a winning start designation command indicating a small hit is received (098SGS701; Y), the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during a small win (098SGS702), and the special figure hit waiting process is ended. . On the other hand, if the hit start designation command indicating a small hit has not been received (098SGS701;N), the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start wait process (098SGS703), and the special figure hit wait is executed. Finish the process.

FIG. 10-39 is a flowchart showing an example of the right hit notification production process (098SGS369) executed by the production control CPU 120. In the right-handed hitting notification performance process shown in FIG. 10-39, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the third right-handed hitting notification image is being displayed (098SGS711), and whether the second right-handed hitting notification image is being displayed. (098SGS712) and whether or not the first right-handed hitting notification image is being displayed (098SGS713) are sequentially determined.

If no right-handed hitting notification image is displayed (098SGS713; N), it is determined whether the time saving state is present (098SGS714). Whether or not it is in the time saving state may be determined based on whether the remaining time saving number specified from the received second special symbol time saving number notification command is not 0.

If it is not in the time saving state (098SGS714; N), the right hit notification production process is ended, while if it is in the time saving state (098SGS714; Y), it is further checked whether the production control process flag is "0" or not. In other words, the state is in a time saving state and the first variable display start waiting process is being executed (that is, the state in which the pending memory of the second special symbol has not been stored yet and there is no winning in the second starting prize opening) ) (098SGS715).

When the production control process flag is "0" (098SGS715; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-51, the display of the first right-handed hitting notification image, which is a medium-sized right-handed hitting notification image, is started. (098SGS716).

In addition, if the production control process flag is not "0" (098SGS715; N), that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol is started due to winning in the second starting winning hole, the process is executed. It is determined whether the current variation pattern is one of PA3-4, PB3-3, and PC3-3 (098SGS717).

If the variation pattern being executed is one of PA3-4, PB3-3, and PC3-3 (098SGS717; Y), the display of the first right-handed hitting notification image is ended (098SGS718 ), as shown in FIG. 10-51, starts displaying a second right-handed hitting notification image that is larger in size (larger right-handed hitting notification image) than the first right-handed hitting notification image (098SGS719), The right-handed hitting notification effect processing ends.

Also, if the variable pattern being executed is not one of PA3-4, PB3-3, and PC3-3 (098SGS717;N), check whether the variable display in question is the last variable display in the time saving state. In other words, it is determined whether this is the last variable display in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A to jackpot C (098SGS720). In addition, whether or not it is the last variable display of the time saving state is determined by the reception of the second game state designation command, the third game state designation command, and the fourth game state designation command, and the notification of the number of remaining second special symbol time savings. This can be determined based on whether the remaining second special symbol time saving number specified from the command is 1 or not.

If the variable display is the last variable display in the time saving state (098SGS720), it is further determined whether the value of the production control process flag is 3, that is, whether it is the end timing of the variable display ( 098SGS721). When the value of the performance control process flag is 3 (098SGS721; Y), the display of the first right-handed hitting notification image is ended (098SGS722), and the right-handed hitting notification performance process is ended. Incidentally, if the variable display is not the last variable display in the time saving state (098SGS720; N) and if the value of the production control process flag is not 3 (098SGS721; N), the right hit notification production process is ended.

Also, while the second right-handed hitting notification image is being displayed (098SGS712; Y), it is determined whether it is the reach timing (098SGS723). Note that whether or not it is the reach timing can be determined from the contents of the process data being executed.

If it is the reach timing (098SGS723; Y), the display of the second right-handed hitting notification image is ended (098SGS724), and as shown in FIG. 10-51, the size ( Display of a third right-handed hitting notification image (small right-handed hitting notification image) is started (098SGS725), and the right-handed hitting notification effect processing is ended.

In addition, if it is not the reach timing (098SGS723; N), check the reception command buffer 098SG194A at the time of start winning (098SGS726) and determine whether the number of second special symbols pending memory has reached the maximum number of 4. (098SGS727). If the second special figure pending memory number is 3 or less (098SGS727; N), the right hit notification production process is terminated, and if the second special figure pending memory number is 4 (098SGS727; Y), the second right At the same time as ending the display of the hitting notification image (098SGS728), the display of the third hitting right notification image is started (098SGS729), and the hitting right notification effect processing is ended.

Also, while the third right-handed hit notification image is being displayed (098SGS711; Y), it is determined whether the value of the production control process flag is 3, that is, whether it is the end timing of the variable display (098SGS730). . If the value of the production control process flag is not 3 (098SGS371; N), the right-handed hitting notification production process is ended, and if the value of the production control process flag is 3 (098SGS731; Y), the third right-handed hitting notification image (098SGS371), and the right-hand hit notification effect processing is ended.

That is, in this characteristic part 098SG, when the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, first, the display of the first right hit notification image is started on the image display device 5. If the time-saving state is a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game of jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C, the first right hit notification is issued based on the completion of the last variable display of the time-saving state. Image display ends.

On the other hand, if the time saving state is a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E, the first right hit notification image is displayed based on the start of the seventh variable display of the time saving state. Instead, display of the second right-handed hitting notification image on the image display device 5 is started. While the second right-handed hitting notification image is being displayed, the display will be replaced by the third right-handed hitting image when the second special symbol pending memory number reaches the maximum number of 4 or when reach timing is reached. Note that the display of the third right-handed image ends based on the end of the variable display.

As the performance control CPU 120 executes each process as described above, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, as shown in FIG. 10-40. In this case, if there is no pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot or small win in the second special symbol pending memory, the seventh variable display of the second special symbol ends and the gaming state returns to the normal state. When controlled, after a 12 second symbol confirmation period, variable display of the second special symbol for 2 seconds is executed four times with a 0.5 second symbol confirmation period in between. In addition, these 12-second symbol confirmation periods, four variable display periods of the second special symbol for 2 seconds each, and the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol for 0.5 seconds each are 21.5 seconds. In seconds, a result screen is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the symbol determination period, the symbol determination period effect for ending the time saving state is also executed.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished up to four times after the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes from the second background image to the first background image. Updated. Thereafter, as a normal state, a variable display of the first special symbol will be executed based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole.

On the other hand, if there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in the second special symbol pending memory, either the meteor effect (first meteor effect) or the stock effect will be displayed during the 12-second symbol confirmation period. There are cases in which one of the above is executed, and a case in which the meteor effect (second meteor effect) is executed during the variable display of the second special symbol in which the variable display result is a jackpot or a small win.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-41, when a meteor effect (first meteor effect) is executed during a 12-second symbol confirmation period, the meteor effect (first meteor effect) is performed for 2 seconds from the start timing of the symbol confirmation period. At the same time as the meteor effect is executed, the symbol confirmation period effect for ending the time saving state and the display of the result screen are executed in the same way as in FIG. 10-40.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-42, if a meteor effect (second meteor effect) is executed during the variable display of the second special symbol whose variable display result is a jackpot or small hit, the start timing of the variable display The meteor effect is executed for 2 seconds from then, and the symbol confirmation period effect for ending the time saving state and the display of the result screen are executed in the same way as in FIG. 10-40.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-43, if the stock effect is executed during the 12 second symbol confirmation period, the stock effect will be executed for 2 seconds from the timing when 10 seconds have elapsed from the symbol confirmation period. . In addition, when the stock effect is executed, the symbol confirmation period effect for ending the time saving state is executed in the same way as in Figure 10-40, while the display of the result screen ends when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed for 10 seconds. do.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-41 to 10-43, when either of these meteor effects or stock effects is executed, the variable display of the second special symbol will be displayed up to four times after the time saving state ends. Since the game is controlled to be in the jackpot game state or the small win game state based on either, the display of the second background image is maintained as the background image displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-44, if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the variable display result will be stored in the second special symbol pending memory. If there is no pending memory that results in a jackpot or small hit, after the 12-second symbol confirmation period of the seventh variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol for 7 seconds will be 0. It is executed up to 92 times with a 5 second symbol confirmation period in between. Also, during the 12 seconds of symbol confirmation period, the symbol confirmation period performance for continuation of the time saving state is executed for 12 seconds, and the result screen is displayed for 10 seconds from the start timing of the symbol confirmation period. Further, the display of the result screen ends when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start timing of the symbol confirmation period, and the stock effect is executed for 2 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-44, when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed seven times in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the variable display result is a jackpot in the second special symbol holding memory. Or, if there is no pending memory that results in a small hit, the time saving state continues even in the variable display of the second special symbol after the 8th time, so the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is the second background image. display is maintained.

On the other hand, if there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in the second special symbol pending memory, either the meteor effect (first meteor effect) or the stock effect will be displayed during the 12-second symbol confirmation period. Either one may be executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-45, when a meteor effect (first meteor effect) is executed during a 12-second symbol confirmation period, the meteor effect is performed for 2 seconds from the start timing of the symbol confirmation period. At the same time as the meteor effect is executed, the symbol confirmation period effect for continuation of the time saving state and the display of the result screen are executed for 12 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-46, if the stock performance is executed during the 12-second symbol confirmation period, the stock effect will be executed within 2 seconds from the timing when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed for 10 seconds, as in Figure 10-44. Stock performance is executed throughout. In addition, when the stock effect is executed, the symbol confirmation period effect for ending the time saving state is executed in the same way as in Figure 10-40, while the display of the result screen ends when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed for 10 seconds. do.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-44 to 10-46, in the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 7 times in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the eighth time in the time-saving state ~ When controlled to a jackpot game state or a small win game state based on either the variable display of the second special symbol at the 12th time, or when the variable display of the second special symbol at the 8th to 12th time in the time saving state Even if it is not controlled to a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state based on the control, it is almost certainly controlled to a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state based on the variable display of the second special symbol at the 99th time when the time saving control ends. Therefore, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is maintained as the second background image.

FIG. 10-47 is a flowchart showing an example of the preview effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-36. In the preview performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (098SGS461). Then, based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern, whether or not to execute the preview performance and the performance pattern are determined (098SGS462).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-48 (A), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided not to perform the preview effect at a rate of 10%, and pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, it is decided to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, and it is decided to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%. The execution of the preview performance in pattern YE-4 is determined at the ratio of .

In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variation pattern is a Super Reach variation pattern (Super Reach is off), 49% of the time it will be decided not to perform the preview effect, and 30% of the time will be decided to change the pattern. It is decided to execute the preview effect in YE-1, at a rate of 15% it is decided to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-2, and at a rate of 5% it is decided to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-3. , the execution of the preview performance in pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern (normal reach is off), 80% of the time it is decided not to execute the preview effect, and 15% of the time the pattern is YE- 1, determines to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-2 at a rate of 5%, decides to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%, and %, the execution of the preview performance in pattern YE-4 is determined.

In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (non-reach is off), 95% of the time it is decided not to execute the preview effect, and 5% of the time, the pattern is It is decided to execute the preview performance in YE-1, at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute the preview performance in pattern YE-2, and at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute the preview performance in pattern YE-3. , determines execution of the preview performance in pattern YE-4 at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIG. 10-48(B), in the preview performance, pattern YE-1 is a performance pattern in which the words "Chance!" are displayed as a line on the image display device 5, and pattern YE-2 Pattern YE-3 is a production pattern in which the words "Hot!" are displayed as a line on the image display device 5, and pattern YE-3 is a production pattern in which the words "Very Hot!" are displayed on the image display device 5 as a line. The pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern in which the image of the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 instead of the dialogue.

In other words, as a preview performance in this feature section 098SG, when the character D is displayed on the image display device 5, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is set to be the highest, and the image display device 5 When "It's super hot!" is displayed as the line, the variable display result is set to have a higher probability of being a jackpot than when character D is displayed. When "Chance!" is displayed as a line on the image display device 5, the probability that the variable display result is a jackpot is set to be the lowest (the lines and characters displayed on the image display device 5 as a preview effect) Jackpot expectation level: Character D > "Super hot!" > "Hot!" > "Chance!").

In other words, in the preview performance of this feature section 098SG, the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 in the same way as when executing the panel display performance, so that the player can be made aware that the jackpot expectation is the highest. , it is possible to improve the game's interest.

Returning to FIG. 10-47, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the preview performance in the process of 098SGS462 (098SGS463). When it is decided to execute the preview performance (098SGS463; Y), the performance pattern of the determined preview performance is stored (098SGS464), a timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance is set, and the preview performance determination process is ended (098SGS467). .

Note that the preview performance is determined by decrementing the value of the preview performance start wait timer by -1 each time the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process, and when the preview performance start wait timer times out. A process table for preview performance corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is selected, and a process timer for preview performance is started. Thereafter, the value of the process timer for preview effects is decremented by 1 every time the variable display process timer is executed, and the value of the process timer for preview effects is changed in the image display device 5 according to the content of the process data corresponding to the value of the process timer for preview effects. A command may be output to the display control unit 123 to display an image according to the pattern.

FIG. 10-49 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect processing shown in FIG. 7. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect process timer is operating (098SGS461). If the process timer for ending effect is not in operation (098SGS461; N), the process table for ending effect is selected (098SGS462), and the process timer for ending effect is started (098SGS463). Then, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1), the production device (image display device 5 as production parts, production parts various lamps, speakers 8L and 8R as presentation parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are executed, and the ending presentation process is ended (098SGS464).

Also, if the process timer for ending effect is in operation (098SGS461; Y), the value of the process timer for ending effect is reduced by 1 (098SGS465), and it is determined whether the process timer for ending effect has timed out. (098SGS466). If the ending effect process timer times out (098SGS466; Y), it is further determined whether the ending effect process timer that has timed out is the last ending effect process timer (098SGS467). If the ending effect process timer that has timed out is not the last ending effect process timer (098SGS467; N), the process data is switched (098SGS468). That is, the ending effect process timer is restarted by setting the ending effect process timer setting value set next in the ending effect process table to the process timer (098SGS469). In addition, based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation part control execution data, input control execution data, etc. included in the process data set next, the production device (production parts) The control state is changed (098SGS470) and the process proceeds to 098SGS472.

In addition, if the process timer for ending effect has not timed out in 098SGS466 (098SGS466;N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer for round di group effect (098SGS471), and in 098SGS472. move on.

In 098SGS472, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the finished jackpot game is a jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot B (098SGS472). If the finished jackpot game is a jackpot game of jackpot C to jackpot E (098SGS472;N), the ending effect processing is finished, and if the finished jackpot game is a jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot B ( 098SGS472;Y), as shown in FIGS. 10-50(A) and 10-50(B), a message indicating that the production mode can be changed on the image display device 5 during the ending production, In response to the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, a performance mode determination process is executed to determine the performance mode from the first mode and the second mode (098SGS473).

Then, if the ending production process timer that timed out in 098SGS467 is the last ending production process timer (098SGS467; Y), it is set to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process of the production control process flag. (098SGS474), ending the ending effect processing.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game in the feature section 098SG will be explained based on FIGS. 10-51 to 10-59. First, as shown in FIG. 10-51(A), when the time saving state is controlled after the end of any jackpot game, if the first mode is selected as the performance mode, the predetermined value of the image display device 5 is At the position (in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 in FIG. 10-51(A)), the game ball is launched toward the passing gate 41 by the player to generate a hit and enter the second starting prize opening. Display of the first right-hand hit notification image that prompts the player to win the game ball starts. The display of the first right-handed hit notification image ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In addition, the time-saving state is the time-saving state after the first hit (any jackpot game of jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C after a jackpot is achieved with the variable display of the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state) In the case of the time saving state after the end), display of the second background image is started on the image display device 5 at the time when the time saving state is controlled.

If the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot D or jackpot E, as shown in Figure 10-51(B), the variable display of the second special symbol for the seventh time is started. Then, on the image display device 5, a second right-handed shot prompts the player to hit the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a normal hit and win the game ball into the second starting prize opening. Display of the notification image begins. Note that the second right-handed hitting notification image is an image larger in size than the first right-handed hitting notification image, and is displayed at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-51 (C) and 10-51 (D), during the variable display that displays the second right-handed hit notification image, each of the second special symbols is displayed as a second panel display effect. The hold display is displayed as one of the panels of characters A to D.

As shown in FIG. 10-51(C), if the number of second special symbols held in memory reaches the maximum number of four while displaying the second right-hand hit notification image, the image display device 5 displays the 2. In place of the right-hand hit notification image, a third right-hand hit that prompts the player to hit the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a normal hit and win the game ball into the second starting prize opening. Display of the notification image begins. Note that the third right-handed hitting notification image is an image smaller in size than the first right-handed hitting notification image, and is displayed at the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-51(E), when it comes to the reach, the reach effect is executed while maintaining the display of the third right hit notification image on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-51 (D), if the number of second special symbols pending does not reach the maximum number of four while displaying the second right-handed notification image, the image display device 5 The display of the second right-handed hit notification image is maintained at . Then, as shown in FIG. 10-51 (E), when it comes to reach, even if the number of second reserved special symbols has not reached four, the image display device 5 displays the third right-hitting notification image instead of the second right-hitting notification image. The right hit notification image starts to be displayed and the reach effect is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-52(A) and 10-52(B), if the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot A, the upper right corner of the image display device 5 When variable display of the second special symbol is started in a state where the first right-hitting notification image is displayed, display of a panel display screen is started on the image display device 5 as a first panel display effect. Incidentally, at this time, the first panel displayed as a panel display effect is a character corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-52(C), when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole, the display of the character panel corresponding to each pending memory of the second special symbol is started. At this time, the characters (panels) displayed according to each pending memory of the second special symbol are determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 10-30(A) regardless of the order of the generated pending memories. The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters (panels) displayed according to each pending memory of the second special symbol may differ depending on the order of the generated pending memories. For example, when targeting the fourth reserved memory of the second special symbol, the rate at which pattern PN-4 is determined as the panel display pattern (character D (the rate at which the panel is displayed) is set higher than the rate at which pattern PN-4 is determined as the panel display pattern when targeting the first to third reserved memories of the second special symbol. By doing so, the player may be able to draw attention to whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot or a small win in the fourth variable display of the second special symbol.

When a plurality of game balls enter the second starting prize opening, a maximum of five panels are displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 10-52(D) to 10-52(F). , the display of the panel display screen and each panel is completed, and the decorative pattern becomes a reach. Then, reach performance starts.

In the reach effect, for example, a battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is executed. If the variable display result is a loss, as shown in FIG. 10-52 (G), the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as a result of the battle performance, and it is announced that the variable display result is a loss. Ru. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a small win or a jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-52 (H), the variable display result becomes a small win when the friendly character wins over the enemy character as a result of the battle performance. You will be notified that you are out of line.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-52 (G), if the variable display result is a failure and the variable display ends, the figure will be displayed in the variable display (up to 4 times) of the second special symbol in the reserved memory. Like 10-52 (E) to 10-52 (H), the reach effect is executed.

In addition, if the variable display result becomes a small hit or a jackpot in any of these variable displays of the second special symbol up to 5 times in total, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state of jackpot C to jackpot E. (If the variable display result is a small win, the condition is that a V win occurs during the small win game).

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-53 (A) and 10-53 (B), if the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot B, then after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B , an operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5 that prompts the player to hit the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a normal hit and win the game ball into the second starting prize opening. Ru. At this time, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started due to the game ball entering the second starting winning hole, the jackpot A A panel of the character D (panel corresponding to the character D for the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B) having a larger size than the panel display performance in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-53(C) and 10-53(D), when the display of the panel corresponding to character D ends after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative pattern becomes a reach. After the decorative symbol becomes a reach, the image display device 5 displays the variable display, the variable display based on the memory of the first retention of the second special symbol, and the second retention of the second special symbol as a win/fail notification effect. An operation promotion image for the push button 31B corresponding to each variable display based on memory is displayed.

When the player operates the push button 31B three times while these push button 31B operation promotion images are displayed, the variable display, the variable display based on the first reserved memory of the second special symbol, If any of the variable display results based on the second reserved memory of the second special symbol are wrong, as shown in Figure 10-53 (E), these three variable display results will be displayed as a result of the success/failure notification effect. It is reported that all variable display results are negative.

At this time, the image display device 5 performs an operation to prompt the player again to hit the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a normal hit and win the game ball into the second starting prize opening. A promotional image will be displayed. Then, after all three variable displays of the second special symbol controlled in the time saving state have been completed, as shown in Figure 10-53 (F), the game ball enters the second starting prize opening. A panel display performance may be executed for variable displays corresponding to the suspended storage of up to four generated second special symbols. In this case, the panel display effects include a panel (for example, a cross mark on character D) indicating that the variable display of the second special symbol three times corresponding to the panel of character D has already been completed as the first panel. By displaying a panel labeled with ``2'', the player may be made to pay more attention to whether or not the remaining variable display results of the second special drawings up to four times will be a small hit or a jackpot.

On the other hand, when the player operates the push button 31B three times while the operation promotion image for the push button 31B shown in FIG. If the variable display result of either the variable display based on the second pending memory or the variable display based on the second pending memory of the second special symbol is a small hit or a jackpot, it is shown in Figure 10-53 (G). As a result of the win/fail notification performance, it is announced that the variable display result will be a small win or a jackpot in any of these three variable displays.

Next, a description will be given of what happens after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (A) and 10-54 (B), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot D, and 2 A case will be explained in which there is no pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in the special figure pending memory. When the seven variable displays of the second special symbol are completed after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, there is a symbol determination period in which the variable display is not performed for 12 seconds. As shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B) and 10-54 (C), when the symbol confirmation period begins, the display of the result screen starts on the image display device 5, and the second special symbol is displayed seven times. Based on the end of the variable display and the gaming state being controlled to the normal state, the symbol determination period performance for ending the time saving state is executed.

Then, as shown in Figures 10-54 (D) and 10-54 (E), after the end of the time saving state ending symbol confirmation period production, the second special symbol that occurred up to four times during the time saving state. Variable display (variable display of the second special symbol up to four times in the normal state) is executed. It should be noted that during the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times, the display of the result screen and the display of the second background image are continued. Then, the fourth variable display of the second special symbol has been completed since the gaming state was controlled to the normal state (the variable display of the second special symbol has been performed a maximum of 11 times since the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D). Based on this fact, the display of the result screen on the image display device 5 ends, and the second background image is updated to the first background image.

Next, in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot D, the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the variable display result becomes a jackpot or a small win in the second special symbol suspension memory. A case where there is a case where the second special symbol is variablely displayed seven times in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot E will be explained. As shown in Figures 10-55 (A) and 10-55 (B), the second special symbol is When the variable display ends, there is a symbol determination period in which the variable display is not executed for 12 seconds, and the display of the result screen starts. Immediately after the start of the pattern confirmation period, based on the existence of a pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in the second special pattern pending memory, a meteor effect in which a shooting star flows in the second background image ( (first meteor effect) may be executed.

If the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, as shown in FIG. 10-55(C), while the symbol confirmation period effect for ending the time saving state is executed, If the state is in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (D), a symbol confirmation period effect for continuation of the time-saving state is executed, and the time-saving state continues for the player. will be notified.

After the end of these symbol confirmation period performances, as shown in Figure 10-55 (E), the second special symbol is displayed variablely from one to four times (based on the pending memory in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot or small hit). After the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state or a small win game state. In addition, while the display of the result screen is executed for a maximum of 21.5 seconds until 2 seconds after the start of the variable display indicating a jackpot or small win, the display of the second background image It is maintained as it is even after the variable display starts.

In addition, the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot D, and at the time when the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is completed, 2. If there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in the special figure pending memory, as shown in Figures 10-56 (A) to 10-56 (E), the seventh 2. After the display of the result screen and the design confirmation period effect for ending the time-saving state are executed during the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display result will be a jackpot or small hit based on the pending memory. A meteor effect (second meteor effect) may be executed from the start.

Furthermore, the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot D, and at the time when the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is completed, 2. If there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in the special figure pending memory, as shown in Figures 10-57 (A) to 10-57 (E), the 7th 2. After the display of the result screen and the symbol confirmation period effect for ending the time saving state are executed during the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display of the special symbol, at the end of the symbol confirmation period, the variable display is displayed in the second special symbol reservation memory. A stock performance may be performed to notify that the result will be a jackpot or a small win.

Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol for the seventh time is executed in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, as shown in FIGS. 10-58(A) to 10-58(D), , After the display of the result screen and the symbol confirmation period effect for continuation of the time saving state are executed during the symbol confirmation period after the end of the seventh variable display of the second special symbol, at the end of the symbol confirmation period, the second special symbol is suspended. A stock effect may be executed to notify that the variable display result in the memory is a jackpot or a small win.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-58 (E) and 10-58 (F), for this stock performance, there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot or small win in the second special figure pending memory. It is executable both in the case where the

In other words, the stock effect executed in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E functions as an effect to notify that the variable display result in the second special figure holding memory will be a jackpot or a small win. In addition to this, there is also a production that notifies you that the time-saving state will continue for a maximum of 92 variable displays (the variable display result will almost certainly be a jackpot or small hit in any of the remaining 92 variable displays). It is also designed to function as a performance to inform people of certain things.

As described above, in this feature section 098SG, as shown in Figure 10-59, among the meteor effect, stock effect, symbol confirmation period effect for time-saving state continuation, and other symbol confirmation period effects, jackpot A to jackpot C are During the symbol confirmation period (10 seconds) of the time-saving state end variable display after the end of the jackpot game state, only other symbol confirmation period effects can be executed, and the time-saving state end variable display (time-saving state In the symbol confirmation period (12 seconds) of the 7th second special figure variable display), it is possible to execute the meteor effect and the stock effect, and the 7th second special figure in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E. During the variable display symbol confirmation period (12 seconds), it is possible to execute a meteor effect, a stock effect, and a symbol confirmation period effect for continuation of the time saving state.

Furthermore, the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) of the second special variable variable display four times after the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, and the eighth time in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot E. In the 12th variable display symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds), it is possible to execute the meteor effect and other symbol confirmation period effects, and in the pattern confirmation period other than the above (0.5 seconds), other Only the design confirmation period performance can be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 098SG, the performance control CPU 120 performs the special performance process as shown in FIG. 10-33 based on receiving the symbol confirmation 2 command and the symbol confirmation 3 command from the CPU 103 Since the first meteor effect or stock effect is executed, even if the symbol confirmation period is 12 seconds in the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot D jackpot game, the first meteor effect or stock effect will be executed. Since the first shooting star performance and stock performance as the look-ahead preview performance in the present invention are executed from the time when the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game ends, the game during the symbol confirmation period It can increase interest.

In addition, in this feature section 098SG, if the first meteor effect or stock effect is executed during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the 7th second special symbol in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, Although the variable display result is a jackpot or a small hit in the variable display based on either of the second special figure holding memories, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second special figure holding memory Even if there is no pending memory in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot or small hit, the first meteor during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the 7th second special symbol in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D A case may be provided in which a performance or a stock performance is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 and 10-33, the production control CPU 120 can execute the first meteor production or stock production based on receiving the symbol confirmation 2 command or the symbol confirmation 3 command from the CPU 103. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the execution control of the first meteor effect and the stock effect as the advance notice effect in the present invention.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing any one of a first meteor performance, a second meteor performance, and a stock performance as a special performance according to the present invention. Furthermore, as these first meteor performance, second meteor performance, and stock performance, the first meteor performance and stock performance will be performed during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the 7th second special symbol in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game. There are cases where the second meteor effect is executed, and cases where the second meteor effect is executed in the variable display of the second special symbol where the 8th to 11th variable display result after the end of the jackpot game is a jackpot or small win. The first meteor performance, the stock performance, and the second meteor performance can be performed at different timings, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the variation patterns are PA3-4, PB3- in the variable display of the second special symbol at the seventh time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D and the variable display of the second special symbol at the seventh time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E. 3. If it is possible to determine one of PC3-3 and a variable display is executed in any of these PA3-4, PB3-3, or PC3-3 variation patterns, a 12 second symbol confirmation period will be provided. On the other hand, if variable display is executed using any other variation pattern, a symbol confirmation period of 10 seconds or 0.5 seconds is provided. As shown in FIGS. 10-37 and 10-38, when the symbol confirmation period is 12 seconds, if the second special symbol is displayed variablely for the seventh time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, the performance control The performance control CPU 120 executes the symbol confirmation period performance for ending the time-saving state, and if the second special symbol is variablely displayed for the seventh time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the performance control CPU 120 executes the symbol confirmation period performance for continuation of the time-saving state. Since the period effect is executed, both the variable display of the second special symbol at the seventh time after the end of the jackpot game for jackpot D and the variable display of the second special symbol at the seventh time after the end of the jackpot game for jackpot E, A variable display is executed in one of the variable patterns of PA3-4, PB3-3, and PC3-3, and a symbol confirmation period of 12 seconds is set as the symbol confirmation period of the variable display, so the jackpot D At the time when the variable display of the second special symbol ends after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the time-saving state ends or continues, and the symbol for ending the time-saving state is displayed during the 12-second symbol confirmation period. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to which one of the fixed period presentation and the symbol fixed period presentation for continuation of a time-saving state is to be executed, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, while it is possible to execute the first meteor performance and stock performance during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the 7th second special symbol in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D During the pattern confirmation period of the 7th variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state, if there is a pending memory in the second special symbol pending memory where the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit, the first meteor effect or stock Since the performance can be executed, whether the first meteor performance or stock performance will be executed during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the 7th second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E. It is possible to attract the attention of the players and improve their interest in the game.

In addition, as the right-handed hitting notification effect in this feature section 098SG, it is possible to display a first right-handed hitting notification image and a third right-handed hitting notification image smaller in size than the first right-handed hitting notification image on the image display device 5. ing. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-51, in the seventh variable display after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D and jackpot E, the performance control CPU 120 first displays the first right hit notification image on the image display device 5. However, when the second special figure pending memory number reaches 4, the third right-hitting notification image is displayed in place of the first right-handed hitting notification image, so the second special figure pending memory number reaches the maximum memory number. To prevent a disadvantage to a player such as the player hitting the game ball excessively due to the display of the first right-hand hitting notification image even though the number of balls has reached 4 balls. I can do it.

In addition, in this feature part 098SG, the image display device 5 has a form in which a third right-handed hitting notification image smaller in size than the first right-handed hitting notification image can be displayed as an image with lower visibility than the first right-handed hitting notification image. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the third right-handed player notification image may be different from the first right-handed player notification image if it is an image with lower visibility than the first right-handed player notification image. The images may have different color schemes, display positions, effects displayed together, image display directions, and the like. In other words, "low visibility" in the present invention includes, in addition to the different sizes as exemplified in the feature section 098SG, different color schemes, different display positions, and different effects displayed together. This includes images with different display directions, etc.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-37, during the symbol confirmation period, the production control CPU 120 performs a symbol confirmation period production for the first hit, a symbol confirmation period production for ending the time saving state, according to the variation pattern of the variable display that has ended. Since any one of the symbol fixed period performances for continuation of the time saving state can be executed, variations can be given to the performances that can be executed during the symbol fixed period, and the game enjoyment can be improved. In addition, in this feature section 098SG, according to the variation pattern of the variable display that has ended, there are symbol confirmation period performances that can be executed during the symbol confirmation period (symbol confirmation period production for the first hit, symbol confirmation period production for ending the time-saving state, Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. , the presentation mode of the symbol fixed period presentation for continuation of the time-saving state may be a presentation that is at least partially different.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-13, the CPU 103 can determine the symbol confirmation period from 12 seconds and 10 seconds according to the determined variation pattern, and the production control CPU 120 Since any one of the symbol determination period performances can be executed according to the symbol determination period, the degree of freedom of the executable performances in the symbol determination period can be increased, and the differences between the respective performances can be easily understood.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-37, if the finished variation pattern is PA3-4, the performance control CPU 120 controls whether the variable display of the second special symbol is performed for the 7th time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. For example, the symbol fixed period performance for ending the time saving state is executed, and if it is the seventh variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the symbol fixed period presentation for continuing the time saving state is executed. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 may execute a different symbol determination period performance in the symbol determination period depending on the jackpot type of the previous jackpot game even if variable display is executed in the same variation pattern. , it is possible to improve the game interest of the pattern fixed period production. In addition, in this feature part 098SG, a variation pattern is provided as a specific variation pattern in the present invention (PA3-4, PB3-3, PC3-3), and multiple periods can be set as a symbol confirmation period for variable display. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide only one variation pattern as the specific variation pattern in the present invention, and to set only one period as the symbol confirmation period of the variable display. Good too. In this case, the performance to be performed within the symbol confirmation period may be varied depending on the timing at which the variable display is performed in the specific variation pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-60, the production control CPU 120 controls whether the variable display symbol determination period is 12 seconds, 10 seconds, or 0.5 seconds during the symbol determination period. Since the types of executable symbol confirmation period effects are different, for example, the same effect may be executed during the 12-second symbol confirmation period as during the 0.5-second symbol confirmation period, causing the effect to be extended. This makes it possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. In addition, although this feature section 098SG exemplifies a form in which the types of executable symbol determination period effects differ depending on the symbol determination period of the variable display, the present invention is not limited to this, and any The same symbol determination period effect may be executed during the symbol determination period as well. In addition, in this way, when performing the same symbol confirmation period performance in any pattern confirmation period, the production style and performance period are different during each symbol confirmation period as a different production from the symbol confirmation period production. The performance may be made executable.

Also, as shown in Figure 10-37, if a 0.5 second symbol confirmation period is set after the variable display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is normal, the symbol confirmation period for the non-time saving state The effect is executed, and if the gaming state is the time-saving state, the symbol confirmation period effect for the time-saving state is executed, so the player can decide whether to perform the symbol confirmation period effect for the non-time-saving state or the symbol confirmation period effect for the time-saving state. It is possible to easily recognize the state controlled by the game player, and different symbol determination period performances depending on the gaming state are executed during the 0.5 second symbol determination period, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 098SG, when a 0.5 second symbol confirmation period is set after the variable display of the second special symbol, a mode is exemplified in which a different symbol confirmation period performance can be executed depending on the gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds is set after the variable display of the second special symbol, the same symbol confirmation period performance can be performed regardless of the gaming state. May be executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the burden on the performance control CPU 120 to decide which symbol determination period performance to execute.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-14, the CPU 103 transmits the symbol confirmation 2 command when the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D is completed, and When the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game ends, the symbol confirmation 3 command is sent, so the production control CPU 120 determines that the finished variable display is the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. It is easy to determine whether it is the final variable display (the variable display of the second special symbol at the 7th time) in the later time-saving state or the variable display of the 2nd special symbol at the 7th time in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E. Therefore, the control load on the performance control CPU 120 can be simplified.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, in the feature section 098SG, the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the variable display result is a jackpot at a rate of 1 in the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. , the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pachinko machine that can set any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities in the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. The present invention may be applied to the gaming machine 1. In this case, during the variable display, it is possible to perform both a preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot and a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed as a preview performance, the setting suggestion performance may be executed at a higher rate than when a performance with a low expectation of a jackpot is executed as a preview performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-60 to 10-65 as modification example 098SG-1, in the variable display start process, the rear variable display is performed as a performance in the latter half of the variable display (for example, during the reach performance). The rear variable display suggestion effect determination processing that determines whether to execute the suggestive effect during the display, and the front variable display that is executed during the first half of the variable display (for example, during the period from the start of the variable display until reaching reach) The performance control CPU 120 executes a rear variable display suggestive performance determination process that determines whether or not to execute the suggestive performance during display.

FIG. 10-60 is a flowchart showing the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process in the variable display start setting process. In the rear variable display suggestive performance determination process shown in FIG. 10-60, the performance control CPU 120 refers to the start winning reception command buffer 098SG194A and specifies the value of the pending display flag corresponding to the variable display (098SGS501). The pending display flag is a flag for displaying the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory on the image display device 5, and is stored in association with each entry in the start winning reception command buffer 098SG194A. . In addition, in this process, if the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 098SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is specified. If the display start command reception flag is set, it is sufficient to specify the entry "2-0" of the reception command buffer 098SG194A at the time of start winning.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestion performance during rear variable display and the performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during rear variable display based on the value of the pending display flag specified in 098SG301 (098SG502).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-61(A), if the value of the pending display flag specified in 098SGS501 is "0", that is, if the pending display preview effect is being executed for the variable display in question. If not, at a rate of 90% it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, at a rate of 10% it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the variable rear display, and at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. It is decided to execute a set suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during variable display. In addition, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 098SGS501 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If so, at a rate of 50% it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, at a rate of 50% it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 098SGS501 is "3", that is, if the pending memory display is displayed with a blue camera as a pending display notice effect targeting the variable display, 30 At a rate of 35%, it is decided to not execute the suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 35%, it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion performance as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 35%, it is decided to perform the suggestion performance during the rear variable display. Decide whether to perform the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 098SGS501 is "4", that is, if the pending memory display is displayed with a red camera as a pending display preview performance for the variable display, the value is 0. At a rate of 30%, it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion performance as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 70%, it is decided to perform a suggestion performance during the rear variable display. Decide whether to perform the setting suggestion effect.

In other words, in the feature section 098SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display preview performance is executed for the variable display, the performance is higher than when the hold display preview performance is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the suggestion effect during rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display preview effect for the variable display (if the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed as a white rectangle or star shape as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It was set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display was determined based on the ratio, and the pending memory display was displayed as a white rectangle or star shape as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the set suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case of the rear variable display.

In addition, we focused on cases where the pending memory display was displayed with a blue or red camera (when the value of the pending display flag was "3" or "4") as a pending display preview effect for the variable display. Then, if the pending memory display was displayed on a red camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display, the pending memory display will be displayed on a blue camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is decided at a higher rate than when the rear variable display is displayed. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as a suggestion effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in the rear variable display.

From the above, in the feature section 098SG of the present embodiment, if the pending memory display is displayed in a square or star shape as a pending display notice effect for the variable display, the rear variable display hint effect is used. While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion performance will be executed, the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display preview performance targeting the variable display. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed as the suggestion performance during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on a red camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display, the pending memory display will be displayed on a blue camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display. Since the percentage of setting suggestion presentations being executed as suggestion presentations during the rear variable display is higher than when the rear variable display is displayed, the game is more likely to be played depending on whether the setting suggestion presentation is executed as the suggestion presentation during the rear variable display. It is now possible to draw people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 10-60, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the suggested performance during rear variable display in the process of 098SGS502 (098SGS503). If it is decided in the processing of 098SGS502 not to execute the suggestion effect during rear variable display, the suggestion effect determination process during rear variable display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during rear variable display in the process of 098SGS502, further In the process of , 098SGS502, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute a jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display (098SGS504).

In the process of 098SGS502, if it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display, the performance pattern of the jackpot suggestion performance is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the processing for determining the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is executed. End (098SGS505).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 098SGS505, there are a total of three effect patterns, pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3, as shown in FIG. 10-61(B). Among these production patterns, pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (jackpot expectation: low) that suggests that the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is Pattern AS-3 is a performance pattern that suggests that the percentage of the variable display result becoming a jackpot is higher than pattern AS-1 (jackpot expectation: medium), and pattern AS-3 has the highest percentage of the variable display result becoming a jackpot. This is a performance pattern that suggests a high level of success (expectation level of jackpot: high).

In the process of the 098SGS505 described above, as shown in FIG. 10-62, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern of the jackpot suggestion performance to pattern AS-1 at a rate of 10%. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, in the process of 098SGS502, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and selects the setting value (pachinko gaming machine 1 (098SGS506). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified setting value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during rear variable display (098SGS507).

As shown in FIG. 10-61(B), a total of five patterns, pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5, are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in 098SG307. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an even number (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), and pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (for example, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the setting value is one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that it is determined whether the setting value is 5 or 6 (high setting). For patterns SS-3 and SS-4, when the setting value is either 5 or 6, the expectation level for the setting value to be 5 or 6 is considered to be low. 6 is said to have high expectations.

In addition, in this modified example 098SG-1, setting values 1 to 4 will be explained as low settings and setting values 5 and 6 as high settings. Alternatively, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set by setting the setting values 1 and 2 as low settings, setting values 3 and 4 as intermediate settings, and setting values 5 and 6 as high settings.

In the process of 098SGS507 described above, as shown in FIG. 10-63, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern to pattern SS- at a rate of 60%. 1, pattern SS-2 is selected at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 6%, and pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Decided on SS-5. In addition, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, and Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of %, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 20%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of %, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and 30%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of %, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In this way, in this modified example 098SG-1, by executing the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-1 and pattern SS-2, it is suggested that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the setting value is By executing the value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, it is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-5, it is determined that the setting value is 6.

FIG. 10-64 is a flowchart showing the front variable display suggestion effect determination process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process. In the front variable display suggestive effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-64, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (098SGS511). Further, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display (098SGS512).

If it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion performance as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display, based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the variable display result, whether or not to execute the suggestion performance during the front variable display and the suggestion during the front variable display. The performance to be executed is determined from the character performance and the timer performance (098SGS513). Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-65 (A), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to not execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. At 30%, it is decided to execute a character presentation as a suggestion presentation during the front variable display, and at a rate of 30%, it is decided to execute a timer presentation as a suggestion presentation during the front variable display. In addition, if the variable display result is incorrect, 70% of the time it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and 25% of the time it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display. Then, at a rate of 5%, it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the rate of execution during the front variable display is higher than when the variable display result is a loss. It is decided to execute the suggestion effect, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution of the character effect and the timer effect are determined at the same rate as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result If it is a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestion performance during the front variable display.In other words, the jackpot expectation level of the timer performance is higher than the jackpot expectation level of the character performance. It is set.

In addition, if execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 executes the suggestion effect during the front variable display based on the execution of the setting suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as the presence/absence and the suggestion effect during front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (098SGS514). Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-65 (B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided not to perform the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. At 70%, it is decided to execute a character effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display, and at a rate of 70%, it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display. In addition, if the variable display result is incorrect, at a rate of 80% it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute the character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. Then, at a rate of 20%, it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the ratio of the variable display result to the front variable display is higher than when the variable display result is a loss. The execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the setting is such that, regardless of whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, the execution of the character effect will not be determined as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. That is, the jackpot expectation level of the timer performance is set higher than the jackpot expectation level of the character performance.

For this reason, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution of the timer effect is decided at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so the front variable display is indicated. When a timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-64, after executing 098SGS513 or 098SGS514, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the suggestion effect during front variable display (098SGS515). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the process for determining the suggestion effect during the front variable display ends, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front section is further It is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute a character presentation as a suggested presentation during variable display (098SGS516).

If it has been decided to execute a character performance as a suggested performance during the front variable display, a performance pattern for the character performance is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the process for determining a suggested performance during the front variable display is ended. (098SGS517).

As the effect patterns for character effects that can be determined in the processing of 098SGS517, there are two effect patterns in total, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, as shown in FIG. 10-65(C). . Among these production patterns, pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (jackpot expectation level: low) that suggests that by displaying character A (not shown) on the image display device 5, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot is the lowest. Yes, pattern CS-2 is a production pattern (Jackpot expectation: medium) that suggests that the proportion of variable display results that become jackpots by displaying character B (not shown) on image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the process of 098SGS517, as shown in FIG. 10-66(A), if the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern of the character performance to pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20%. , and pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the performance pattern of the character performance is determined to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80%, and pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the above-mentioned part variable display suggestive effect determination process is ended (098SGS518).

As the performance patterns of the timer performance that can be determined in the processing of 098SGS518, there are a total of two performance patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. 10-65(C). Among these performance patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the proportion of variable display results that become jackpots on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 for character performances (Jackpot expectation: high ), this is a performance that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display together with the image of character It suggests that this is higher than the character performance pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (jackpot expectation level: high), and the period until the start of execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is shown for 25 seconds with the image of character Y. (See Figure 10-66(C)).

Therefore, in the processing of 098SGS518, the performance control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Pattern TS-1 is determined at a rate of 80%, and pattern TS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. In addition, if the rear variable display suggestion performance that has been decided to be executed is a setting suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 determines pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decided on 2.

In other words, when a timer effect is executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2 (in other words, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2) (in other words, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-1), When the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the rate at which the setting suggestion performance is executed as the suggestion performance during rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in modification 098SG-1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance period of the timer performance and the characters displayed on the image display device 5. Furthermore, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2, it is possible to make the player expect the setting suggestion effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game's interest.

As described above, in this modified example 098SG-1, as shown in FIG. 10-65(D), when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the character The expectation of jackpot is set higher than when the performance is executed, and the setting suggestion performance is set as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character performance is performed as a suggestion performance during the front variable display. It is set to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-60 to 10-67, when it is decided to execute the front variable display suggestive effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display suggestive effect during the variable display process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the front variable display suggestive effect may be set, and the effect device may be controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect processing (S172). In addition, when it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestive effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the value of the rear variable display suggestive effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable display effect process is executed. Then, based on the fact that the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display becomes 0, process data corresponding to the determined performance pattern of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display rendering process (S172), the rendering device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer.

In addition, in the feature section 098SG, in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the stock is stocked after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times (during the variable display of the second special symbol for the eleventh time). Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the performance is executed and the player is informed that the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the present invention is not limited to this, and modifications may be made. As example 098SG-2, in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, for example, a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B during the period when the result screen is displayed on the image display device 5 (a new starting winning ball (occurrence), etc., a special notification performance can be executed that informs that the time-saving state is the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, as a performance different from the stock performance. You can also use it as

By doing this, when the control is in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the same result screen is displayed as when the control is in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. During the period, it is announced that the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E in accordance with the occurrence of the start winning of the second special symbol, so that the game interest can be improved. Further, the special notification effect is not executed unless a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B while the result screen is displayed on the image display device 5. In other words, since the player can select whether or not to execute the special notification effect, the range of game selections can be expanded and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modified example 098SG-2, a form in which both the stock performance and the special notification performance can be executed in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , In the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, only the special notification performance among the stock performance and the special notification performance may be executable.

Furthermore, in this modified example 098SG-2, a special notification effect can be executed in response to a game ball winning a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B during the period when the result screen is displayed on the image display device 5. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special notification effect may be executed in response to a game ball winning a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B at any timing.

In addition, in the feature section 098SG, after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the stock effect is executed during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the second special symbol at the 7th time, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modification 098SG-3, after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the stock performance may be executed in a period other than the symbol confirmation period of the seventh variable display of the second special symbol.

In particular, as shown in Figure 10-68, if the stock effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol for the 11th time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D is reduced. Similarly to the state, a 12-second symbol confirmation period is provided after the end of the seventh variable display of the second special symbol, and a variable display in which the second special symbol's variable display results are missed for the 8th to 10th times is set for 2 seconds each. Execute over the following period. Then, the result screen is displayed from the start timing of the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the second special symbol in the 7th time until the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the 11th time, and the result screen is displayed. Stock performance is executed from the display end timing.

By doing this, when the variable display of the 7th second special symbol ends in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, whether or not the stock effect is executed after the display of the result screen ends. Since it is possible to attract the attention of the players, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 098SG, in the period from the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the second special symbol at the 7th time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D and jackpot E to the variable display of the second special symbol at the 11th time, Although a form in which any one of the first meteor effect, the second meteor effect, and the stock effect can be executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. During the period from the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the second special symbol in the 7th time to the variable display of the second special symbol in the 11th time, at least two or more performances from among the first meteor effect, the second meteor effect, and the stock effect are performed. may be executable.

In addition, in the feature section 098SG, as shown in FIG. 10-14, when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, if the variable display is executed in the normal state, the CPU 103 Although the form in which the command is transmitted to the production control board 12 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 098SG-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state is finished. Alternatively, the CPU 103 may send a symbol confirmation 2 command, a symbol confirmation 3 command, or a dedicated symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 when the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state is finished. . By doing this, the production control CPU 120 receives these symbol confirmation 2 commands, symbol confirmation 3 commands, and dedicated symbol confirmation commands, and completes the variable display of the second special symbol specified in the normal state. Since this can be easily specified, the control executed by the performance control CPU 120 can be simplified.

In particular, regarding the variable display of the second special symbol for the 8th to 11th times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D (the 1st to 4th times after the control is controlled to the normal state), the production control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to Based on the reception of the command, the three symbol confirmation commands, and the dedicated symbol confirmation command, it may be determined whether or not to execute the second meteor effect in the next variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the feature section 098SG, when it is decided to execute the second meteor effect (to execute the meteor effect during the variable display where the variable display result is a jackpot or small win), the feature section 098SG executes the second meteor effect. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the management is performed using a timer (timer waiting for the start of the second meteor effect), the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is decided to execute the second meteor effect, the execution target of the second meteor effect is determined. A counter may be set in accordance with the number of variable displays until the variable display of , and the execution of the second meteor effect may be managed based on the value of the counter. The value of the counter is, for example, decremented by 1 each time the production control CPU 120 determines that a symbol confirmation 1 command has been received, and based on the counter value reaching 0, the production control CPU 120 is decremented by 1. The CPU 120 may execute the second meteor effect during the next variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the feature section 098SG, when the variable display ends, the CPU 103 transmits one of the symbol confirmation 1 command, symbol confirmation 2 command, and symbol confirmation 3 command to the production control board 12 regardless of the variable display result. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol confirmation command sent by the CPU 103 when these variable displays are finished determines the jackpot game state and small win based on the variable display to be executed next time. It may be made to vary depending on whether or not the winning game state is controlled. By doing this, for example, the variable display of the second special symbol on the 8th to 11th times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D (the 1st to 4th times after being controlled to the normal state) or the jackpot game of jackpot E In the 8th to 11th variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the end, the performance control CPU 120 executes the second meteor performance in the next variable display of the second special symbol based on the received symbol confirmation command. Since it is possible to decide whether or not to perform the second meteor effect, there is no need for the effect control CPU 120 to decide whether to perform the second meteor effect during the special effect processing, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 can be reduced.

In addition, in the characteristic section 098SG, although the form in which the panel display effect is executed in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A and jackpot B is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E is controlled via the small win based on the variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game B, the panel display performance is executed in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game. You may. In addition, when executing the panel display effect in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E, the panel display effect is started from the last variable display in the time-saving state, and the variable display and the game state are The panel display effect may be executed over a maximum of three variable displays of the second special symbol after the second special symbol is controlled to the normal state. In particular, the panel display effects include, from the last variable display of the time saving state, to the panel displaying the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A on the image display device 5 in the same way as the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B. A panel of character D that is larger in size than the display effect (a panel compatible with character D for the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B) is displayed, and the variable display and the game state are controlled to the normal state, and then executed. By executing the win/fail notification performance for the variable display of the second special symbols three times (suspended storage of the three second special symbols), a panel corresponding to character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel display performance. In this case, it is possible to further increase the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot or a small win.

In addition, although the characteristic section 098SG exemplifies the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled into a jackpot gaming state and a small winning gaming state based on the variable display of special symbols, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be capable of controlling only the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display of special symbols.

Further, although a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the gaming machine of the present invention can be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of characteristic parts and modifications. You may.

For example, by applying the feature section 098SG to the pachinko gaming machines shown in FIGS. 1 to 9 or the modified example 098SG-1, the pachinko gaming machine can perform meteor effects and stock effects, and also The jackpot probability may be changeable. In addition, in such a pachinko game machine, as modification example 098SG-5, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine is a high setting value (for example, 6), the seventh time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D During the pattern confirmation period of the variable display of the second special symbol, even if there is no pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in the second special symbol pending memory, the meteor effect, stock effect, or these It may be possible to perform a performance similar to a meteor performance or a stock performance. By doing this, if the meteor effect or stock effect is executed during the symbol confirmation period, the variable display result of the second special symbol after that will be a jackpot or a small win (in other words, the pachinko machine will have a high Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the set value has been set (which indicates that the set value has been set), the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, when the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine in which the jackpot probability can be changed according to a set value, the execution rate of the advance notice performance in a specific performance pattern can be set in the pachinko game machine. It may be made to vary depending on the set value. For example, in the feature section 098SG, it is possible to execute a preview performance during variable display, and the expectation of a jackpot is highest when the preview performance is executed in pattern YE-4 (Figure 10- 48), the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine, the higher the rate at which the preview performance is executed in pattern YE-4 when the variable display result is a failure.

By doing this, when the preview performance is executed in pattern YE-4, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the preview performance is executed in pattern YE-4. Even if the variable display result is a failure when the game is executed, it is possible to suggest to the player that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine.

In addition, the characteristic section 098SG refers to the contents of the starting prize receiving command buffer 098SG194A at the time when the variable display of the second special symbol for the seventh time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E is completed, and the reference result is If there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in the 2nd special symbol pending memory, then during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the 7th second special symbol or the variable display result is a jackpot or a small hit. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the meteor effect or the stock effect is executed during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a small win, the present invention is not limited to this. At the start of the variable display of the 2nd special symbol for the 7th time later, the contents of the received command buffer 098SG194A at the time of starting winning are referred to, and as a result of this reference, the variable display result in the 2nd special symbol pending memory becomes a jackpot or a small win. If there is a pending memory, even if it is notified that there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in the second special symbol pending memory during the variable display of the second special symbol for the seventh time. good.

In addition, if there is no pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in the 2nd special symbol pending memory, when the variable display of the 2nd special symbol ends for the 7th time, the winning will start again. With reference to the contents of the received command buffer 098SG194A, it may be determined whether the newly generated second special symbol pending storage is a pending storage whose variable display result is a jackpot or a small hit. Then, when the newly generated second special figure pending memory is a pending memory whose variable display result is a jackpot or a small hit, it may be decided to execute the meteor effect or the stock effect. Incidentally, the timing to perform the meteor effect or the stock effect may be determined by lottery between during the symbol confirmation period and during the variable display where the variable display result is a jackpot or small win, as in the feature section 098SG.

In addition, in the feature section 098SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-40 to 10-46, the execution period of the symbol confirmation period effect for continuation of the time-saving state and the pattern confirmation period effect for ending the time-saving state is 12 seconds. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the symbol definite period performance for continuation of the time saving state and the symbol definite period performance for ending the time saving state may be less than 12 seconds. In particular, if the execution period of the symbol confirmation period performance for continuation of the time-saving state and the pattern confirmation period performance for ending the time-saving state is less than 12 seconds, during the 12-second symbol confirmation period, these symbol confirmation period for continuation of the time-saving state A plurality of start timings may be provided for the performance and the symbol confirmation period performance for ending the time saving state. Furthermore, depending on which pattern confirmation period effect is executed during the 12-second pattern confirmation period, the pattern confirmation period effect for continuation of the time-saving state or the pattern confirmation period effect for ending the time-saving state, the pattern is confirmed from each start timing. The rate at which period effects are executed may be varied. By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which starting timing the symbol fixed period performance is to be executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic section 098SG, a mode in which the first meteor effect can be executed during a part of the display period of the result screen is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first meteor effect is , may be executed during the entire display period of the result screen.

In addition, in the feature section 098SG, when the result screen is displayed from the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the 7th second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, the display of the result screen is changed to indicate that the result of the variable display is a jackpot. Or, although the form continues until after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a small hit, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second special symbol is displayed for the seventh time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. When displaying the result screen from the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of symbols, the display of the result screen may be ended at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in which the variable display result is a jackpot or a small win.

Further, in the feature section 098SG, the CPU 103 is. Exclusive for when the variable display of the second special figure in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D ends, and when the variable display of the second special figure in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E ends. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the symbol confirmation command (symbol confirmation 2 command or symbol confirmation 3 command) is sent to the production control board 12, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 Dedicated symbol confirmation command according to the symbol confirmation period (for example, if the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation 1 command, if the pattern confirmation period is 10 seconds, the symbol confirmation command dedicated to the 10 seconds, the symbol If the confirmation period is 12 seconds, a symbol confirmation command dedicated to the 12 seconds may be sent to the production control board 12. By doing so, the production control CPU 120 can specify the symbol confirmation period from the received symbol confirmation command, so that it can execute an appropriate symbol confirmation period presentation according to the specified symbol confirmation period. can.

In addition, in the feature section 098SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as a game machine that can play a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that can play a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that can play a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as the game can be played.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A normal variable display based on normal identification information and a special variable display based on special identification information can be executed, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player is created based on a specific display result being displayed as a variable display result of the special variable display. A controllable gaming machine,
a variable means capable of changing from a first state to a second state more advantageous than the first state based on a predetermined display result being displayed as a variable display result of the normal variable display;
variable display pattern determining means capable of determining the variable display pattern of the special variable display from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns including the specific variable display pattern;
result display period determining means capable of determining a display period in which variable display results of the special variable display are displayed;
As a special state in which the variable means is more likely to change to the second state than in the normal state, the first special state can be controlled for a first number of special variable displays, and the second special state can be controlled for the first number of times. state control means capable of controlling over a second number of special variable displays greater than;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining the specific variable display pattern for both the final special variable display in the first special state and the first special variable display in the second special state,
The result display period determining means is capable of determining the first period for the special variable display for which the specific variable display pattern has been determined, and for the special variable display for which the specific variable display pattern has not been determined. a second period shorter than the first period can be determined;
The performance execution means is
When the variable display result of the special variable display is displayed in the first period, it is possible to execute a special effect,
When the special performance is performed in the first special state, the special performance can be performed in a first mode,
When the special performance is performed in the second special state, the special performance can be performed in a second mode,
Suggesting that the special state ends when the special performance is executed in the first mode,
Suggesting that the special state will continue when the special performance is executed in the second mode,
A first operation promotion effect is executed during a period until the final special variable display in the first special state is executed and a period until the first special variable display is executed in the second special state. It is possible to
It is possible to perform a second operation promotion effect when the final special variable display in the first special state and the first special variable display in the second special state are executed;
When executing the second operation promotion performance, it is possible to end the second operation promotion performance in response to the establishment of a special condition;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images